R&S®RTH User Manual (download version)

R&S®RTH User Manual (download version)
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Handheld Digital Oscilloscope
User Manual
(=J?Ü2)
User Manual
Test & Measurement
1326.1578.02 ─ 04
This manual describes the following R&S®RTH models with firmware version 1.10 and higher:
●
R&S®RTH1004 (1317.5000.K04)
●
R&S®RTH1002 (1317.5000.K02)
© 2016 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
Email: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S®Scope Rider RTH is abbreviated as R&S RTH.
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully
complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must
observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these
safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.
Safety labels on products
The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers.
Symbol
Meaning
Notice, general danger location
Symbol
Meaning
ON/OFF Power
Observe product documentation
Caution when handling heavy equipment
Standby indication
Danger of electric shock
Direct current (DC)
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 1
Basic Safety Instructions
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
Caution ! Hot surface
Alternating current (AC)
Protective conductor terminal
To identify any terminal which is intended for
connection to an external conductor for
protection against electric shock in case of a
fault, or the terminal of a protective earth
Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)
Earth (Ground)
Class II Equipment
to identify equipment meeting the safety
requirements specified for Class II equipment
(device protected by double or reinforced
insulation)
Frame or chassis Ground terminal
EU labeling for batteries and accumulators
For additional information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 1.
Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive
devices
EU labeling for separate collection of electrical
and electronic devices
For additional information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 2.
Warning! Laser radiation
For additional information, see section
"Operation", item 7.
Signal words and their meaning
The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related, e.g.
messages relating to property damage.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 2
Basic Safety Instructions
Operating states and operating positions
The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, use only
indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency,
overvoltage category 2, pollution degree 2.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
even death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
even death.
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the mains-supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains, or if the power switch is not
suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the
mains. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all
times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the connecting cable
must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection
from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems,
the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 3
Basic Safety Instructions
6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 or IEC 61010-1 / EN 61010-1 standards that
apply in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 4
Basic Safety Instructions
2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with EN 55011/CISPR 11, and analogously with EN 55022/CISPR 22,
EN 55032/CISPR 32)
 Class A equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments
that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Note: Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment. This equipment may
cause radio disturbances in residential environments, due to possible conducted as well as
radiated disturbances. In this case, the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to
eliminate these disturbances.
 Class B equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Repair and service
1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 5
Basic Safety Instructions
2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.
Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells
If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
5. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
6. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
7. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 6
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Waste disposal/Environmental protection
1. Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted
municipal waste, but must be collected separately. It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection
point or via a Rohde & Schwarz customer service center.
2. Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste, but
must be collected separately.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for
take-back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU. Contact your
Rohde & Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product.
3. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
4. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
For additional information about environmental protection, visit the Rohde & Schwarz website.
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
¡Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de seguridad.
Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deberá
atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas
informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 7
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos específicos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentación del producto.
Señalización de seguridad de los productos
Las siguientes señales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros.
Símbolo
Significado
Aviso: punto de peligro general
Observar la documentación del producto
Símbolo
Significado
Tensión de alimentación de PUESTA EN
MARCHA / PARADA
Atención en el manejo de dispositivos de peso
elevado
Indicación de estado de espera (standby)
Peligro de choque eléctrico
Corriente continua (DC)
Advertencia: superficie caliente
Corriente alterna (AC)
Conexión a conductor de protección
Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)
Conexión a tierra
El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un
aislamiento doble (reforzado)
Conexión a masa
Distintivo de la UE para baterías y
acumuladores
Más información en la sección
"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 1.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 8
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Símbolo
Significado
Símbolo
Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos
sensibles a la electrostática (ESD)
Significado
Distintivo de la UE para la eliminación por
separado de dispositivos eléctricos y
electrónicos
Más información en la sección
"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 2.
Advertencia: rayo láser
Más información en la sección
"Funcionamiento", punto 7.
Palabras de señal y su significado
En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, causa lesiones
graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones leves o moderadas.
Indica información que se considera importante, pero no en relación
con situaciones de peligro; p. ej., avisos sobre posibles daños
materiales.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento
El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 9
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, índice de suciedad 2.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexión de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexión se deberá considerar como un dispositivo de desconexión.
El dispositivo de desconexión se debe poder alcanzar fácilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión, la longitud del cable de
conexión no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si se
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el
nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 10
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión U eff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 11
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados ―los llamados
alérgenos (p. ej. el níquel)―. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. Los productos con láser están provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en función de la
clase de láser del que se trate. Los rayos láser pueden provocar daños de tipo biológico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiación y debido a su concentración extrema de potencia electromagnética.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
8. Clases de compatibilidad electromagnética (conforme a EN 55011 / CISPR 11; y en analogía con EN
55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
 Aparato de clase A:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos
conectados directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a
edificios residenciales.
Nota: Los aparatos de clase A están destinados al uso en entornos industriales. Estos aparatos
pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles
perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podrá solicitar al operador que tome las
medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.
 Aparato de clase B:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, así como en aquellos conectados
directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a edificios
residenciales.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 12
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Baterías y acumuladores o celdas
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
5. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
6. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
7. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 13
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.
Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente
1. Los dispositivos marcados contienen una batería o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los
residuos domésticos sin clasificar, sino que debe ser recogido por separado. La eliminación se debe
efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al
cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
2. Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar,
sino que deben ser recogidos por separado.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminación de residuos y asume
plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminación para los fabricantes dentro de la UE. Para
desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente, diríjase a su servicio de atención
al cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
3. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
4. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
Se puede encontrar más información sobre la protección del medio ambiente en la página web de
Rohde & Schwarz.
1171.0000.42 - 08
Page 14
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
Lesen und beachten Sie unbedingt die nachfolgenden Anweisungen und Sicherheitshinweise!
Alle Werke und Standorte der Rohde & Schwarz Firmengruppe sind ständig bemüht, den
Sicherheitsstandard unserer Produkte auf dem aktuellsten Stand zu halten und unseren Kunden ein
höchstmögliches Maß an Sicherheit zu bieten. Unsere Produkte und die dafür erforderlichen Zusatzgeräte
werden entsprechend der jeweils gültigen Sicherheitsvorschriften gebaut und geprüft. Die Einhaltung
dieser Bestimmungen wird durch unser Qualitätssicherungssystem laufend überwacht. Das vorliegende
Produkt ist gemäß beiliegender EU-Konformitätsbescheinigung gebaut und geprüft und hat das Werk in
sicherheitstechnisch einwandfreiem Zustand verlassen. Um diesen Zustand zu erhalten und einen
gefahrlosen Betrieb sicherzustellen, muss der Benutzer alle Hinweise, Warnhinweise und Warnvermerke
beachten. Bei allen Fragen bezüglich vorliegender Sicherheitshinweise steht Ihnen die Rohde & Schwarz
Firmengruppe jederzeit gerne zur Verfügung.
Darüber hinaus liegt es in der Verantwortung des Benutzers, das Produkt in geeigneter Weise zu
verwenden. Das Produkt ist ausschließlich für den Betrieb in Industrie und Labor bzw., wenn ausdrücklich
zugelassen, auch für den Feldeinsatz bestimmt und darf in keiner Weise so verwendet werden, dass einer
Person/Sache Schaden zugefügt werden kann. Die Benutzung des Produkts außerhalb des
bestimmungsgemäßen Gebrauchs oder unter Missachtung der Anweisungen des Herstellers liegt in der
Verantwortung des Benutzers. Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Zweckentfremdung
des Produkts.
Die bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung des Produkts wird angenommen, wenn das Produkt nach den
Vorgaben der zugehörigen Produktdokumentation innerhalb seiner Leistungsgrenzen verwendet wird
(siehe Datenblatt, Dokumentation, nachfolgende Sicherheitshinweise). Die Benutzung des Produkts
erfordert Fachkenntnisse und zum Teil englische Sprachkenntnisse. Es ist daher zu beachten, dass das
Produkt ausschließlich von Fachkräften oder sorgfältig eingewiesenen Personen mit entsprechenden
Fähigkeiten bedient werden darf. Sollte für die Verwendung von Rohde & Schwarz-Produkten persönliche
Schutzausrüstung erforderlich sein, wird in der Produktdokumentation an entsprechender Stelle darauf
hingewiesen. Bewahren Sie die grundlegenden Sicherheitshinweise und die Produktdokumentation gut
auf und geben Sie diese an weitere Benutzer des Produkts weiter.
Die Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise dient dazu, Verletzungen oder Schäden durch Gefahren aller Art
auszuschließen. Hierzu ist es erforderlich, dass die nachstehenden Sicherheitshinweise vor der
Benutzung des Produkts sorgfältig gelesen und verstanden sowie bei der Benutzung des Produkts
beachtet werden. Sämtliche weitere Sicherheitshinweise wie z.B. zum Personenschutz, die an
entsprechender Stelle der Produktdokumentation stehen, sind ebenfalls unbedingt zu beachten. In den
vorliegenden Sicherheitshinweisen sind sämtliche von der Rohde & Schwarz Firmengruppe vertriebenen
Waren unter dem Begriff „Produkt“ zusammengefasst, hierzu zählen u. a. Geräte, Anlagen sowie
sämtliches Zubehör.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 1
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
Symbole und Sicherheitskennzeichnungen
Symbol
Bedeutung
Achtung, allgemeine Gefahrenstelle
Symbol
Bedeutung
EIN-/AUS (Versorgung)
Produktdokumentation beachten
Vorsicht beim Umgang mit Geräten mit hohem
Gewicht
Stand-by-Anzeige
Gefahr vor elektrischem Schlag
Gleichstrom (DC)
Warnung vor heißer Oberfläche
Wechselstrom (AC)
Schutzleiteranschluss
Gleichstrom/Wechselstrom (DC/AC)
Erdungsanschluss
Gerät entspricht den Sicherheitsanforderungen an die Schutzklasse II
(Gerät durchgehend durch doppelte /
verstärkte Isolierung geschützt.
Masseanschluss des Gestells oder Gehäuses
EU - Kennzeichnung für Batterien und
Akkumulatoren.
Das Gerät enthält eine Batterie bzw. einen
Akkumulator. Diese dürfen nicht über
unsortierten Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden,
sondern sollten getrennt gesammelt werden.
Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7.
Achtung beim Umgang mit elektrostatisch
gefährdeten Bauelementen
EU - Kennzeichnung für die getrennte
Sammlung von Elektro- und
Elektronikgeräten.
Elektroaltgeräte dürfen nicht über unsortierten
Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden, sondern
müssen getrennt gesammelt werden.
Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7.
Warnung vor Laserstrahl
Produkte mit Laser sind je nach ihrer LaserKlasse mit genormten Warnhinweisen
versehen.
Laser können aufgrund der Eigenschaften
ihrer Strahlung und aufgrund ihrer extrem
konzentrierten elektromagnetischen Leistung
biologische Schäden verursachen.
Für zusätzliche Informationen siehe Kapitel
„Betrieb“ Punkt 7.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 2
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
Signalworte und ihre Bedeutung
Die folgenden Signalworte werden in der Produktdokumentation verwendet, um vor Risiken und Gefahren
zu warnen.
kennzeichnet eine unmittelbare Gefährdung mit hohem Risiko, die Tod oder
schwere Körperverletzung zur Folge haben wird, wenn sie nicht vermieden
wird.
kennzeichnet eine mögliche Gefährdung mit mittlerem Risiko, die Tod oder
(schwere) Körperverletzung zur Folge haben kann, wenn sie nicht vermieden
wird.
kennzeichnet eine Gefährdung mit geringem Risiko, die leichte oder mittlere
Körperverletzungen zur Folge haben könnte, wenn sie nicht vermieden wird.
weist auf die Möglichkeit einer Fehlbedienung hin, bei der das Produkt
Schaden nehmen kann.
Diese Signalworte entsprechen der im europäischen Wirtschaftsraum üblichen Definition für zivile
Anwendungen. Neben dieser Definition können in anderen Wirtschaftsräumen oder bei militärischen
Anwendungen abweichende Definitionen existieren. Es ist daher darauf zu achten, dass die hier
beschriebenen Signalworte stets nur in Verbindung mit der zugehörigen Produktdokumentation und nur in
Verbindung mit dem zugehörigen Produkt verwendet werden. Die Verwendung von Signalworten in
Zusammenhang mit nicht zugehörigen Produkten oder nicht zugehörigen Dokumentationen kann zu
Fehlinterpretationen führen und damit zu Personen- oder Sachschäden führen.
Betriebszustände und Betriebslagen
Das Produkt darf nur in den vom Hersteller angegebenen Betriebszuständen und Betriebslagen ohne
Behinderung der Belüftung betrieben werden. Werden die Herstellerangaben nicht eingehalten, kann dies
elektrischen Schlag, Brand und/oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen, unter Umständen mit
Todesfolge, verursachen. Bei allen Arbeiten sind die örtlichen bzw. landesspezifischen Sicherheits- und
Unfallverhütungsvorschriften zu beachten.
1. Sofern nicht anders vereinbart, gilt für R&S-Produkte folgendes:
als vorgeschriebene Betriebslage grundsätzlich Gehäuseboden unten, IP-Schutzart 2X,
Verschmutzungsgrad 2, Überspannungskategorie 2, nur in Innenräumen verwenden, Betrieb bis
2000 m ü. NN, Transport bis 4500 m ü. NN, für die Nennspannung gilt eine Toleranz von ±10%, für
die Nennfrequenz eine Toleranz von ±5%.
2. Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf Oberflächen, Fahrzeuge, Ablagen oder Tische, die aus Gewichtsoder Stabilitätsgründen nicht dafür geeignet sind. Folgen Sie bei Aufbau und Befestigung des
Produkts an Gegenständen oder Strukturen (z.B. Wände und Regale) immer den Installationshinweisen des Herstellers. Bei Installation abweichend von der Produktdokumentation können
Personen verletzt, unter Umständen sogar getötet werden.
3. Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf hitzeerzeugende Gerätschaften (z.B. Radiatoren und Heizlüfter). Die
Umgebungstemperatur darf nicht die in der Produktdokumentation oder im Datenblatt spezifizierte
Maximaltemperatur überschreiten. Eine Überhitzung des Produkts kann elektrischen Schlag, Brand
und/oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen, unter Umständen mit Todesfolge, verursachen.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 3
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
Elektrische Sicherheit
Werden die Hinweise zur elektrischen Sicherheit nicht oder unzureichend beachtet, kann dies elektrischen
Schlag, Brand und/oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen, unter Umständen mit Todesfolge,
verursachen.
1. Vor jedem Einschalten des Produkts ist sicherzustellen, dass die am Produkt eingestellte
Nennspannung und die Netznennspannung des Versorgungsnetzes übereinstimmen. Ist es
erforderlich, die Spannungseinstellung zu ändern, so muss ggf. auch die dazu gehörige
Netzsicherung des Produkts geändert werden.
2. Bei Produkten der Schutzklasse I mit beweglicher Netzzuleitung und Gerätesteckvorrichtung ist der
Betrieb nur an Steckdosen mit Schutzkontakt und angeschlossenem Schutzleiter zulässig.
3. Jegliche absichtliche Unterbrechung des Schutzleiters, sowohl in der Zuleitung als auch am Produkt
selbst, ist unzulässig. Es kann dazu führen, dass von dem Produkt die Gefahr eines elektrischen
Schlags ausgeht. Bei Verwendung von Verlängerungsleitungen oder Steckdosenleisten ist sicherzustellen, dass diese regelmäßig auf ihren sicherheitstechnischen Zustand überprüft werden.
4. Sofern das Produkt nicht mit einem Netzschalter zur Netztrennung ausgerüstet ist, beziehungsweise
der vorhandene Netzschalter zu Netztrennung nicht geeignet ist, so ist der Stecker des
Anschlusskabels als Trennvorrichtung anzusehen.
Die Trennvorrichtung muss jederzeit leicht erreichbar und gut zugänglich sein. Ist z.B. der Netzstecker
die Trennvorrichtung, darf die Länge des Anschlusskabels 3 m nicht überschreiten.
Funktionsschalter oder elektronische Schalter sind zur Netztrennung nicht geeignet. Werden Produkte
ohne Netzschalter in Gestelle oder Anlagen integriert, so ist die Trennvorrichtung auf Anlagenebene
zu verlagern.
5. Benutzen Sie das Produkt niemals, wenn das Netzkabel beschädigt ist. Überprüfen Sie regelmäßig
den einwandfreien Zustand der Netzkabel. Stellen Sie durch geeignete Schutzmaßnahmen und
Verlegearten sicher, dass das Netzkabel nicht beschädigt werden kann und niemand z.B. durch
Stolperfallen oder elektrischen Schlag zu Schaden kommen kann.
6. Der Betrieb ist nur an TN/TT Versorgungsnetzen gestattet, die mit höchstens 16 A abgesichert sind
(höhere Absicherung nur nach Rücksprache mit der Rohde & Schwarz Firmengruppe).
7. Stecken Sie den Stecker nicht in verstaubte oder verschmutzte Steckdosen/-buchsen. Stecken Sie die
Steckverbindung/-vorrichtung fest und vollständig in die dafür vorgesehenen Steckdosen/-buchsen.
Missachtung dieser Maßnahmen kann zu Funken, Feuer und/oder Verletzungen führen.
8. Überlasten Sie keine Steckdosen, Verlängerungskabel oder Steckdosenleisten, dies kann Feuer oder
elektrische Schläge verursachen.
9. Bei Messungen in Stromkreisen mit Spannungen Ueff > 30 V ist mit geeigneten Maßnahmen Vorsorge
zu treffen, dass jegliche Gefährdung ausgeschlossen wird (z.B. geeignete Messmittel, Absicherung,
Strombegrenzung, Schutztrennung, Isolierung usw.).
10. Bei Verbindungen mit informationstechnischen Geräten, z.B. PC oder Industrierechner, ist darauf zu
achten, dass diese der jeweils gültigen IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 oder IEC 61010-1 / EN 61010-1
entsprechen.
11. Sofern nicht ausdrücklich erlaubt, darf der Deckel oder ein Teil des Gehäuses niemals entfernt
werden, wenn das Produkt betrieben wird. Dies macht elektrische Leitungen und Komponenten
zugänglich und kann zu Verletzungen, Feuer oder Schaden am Produkt führen.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 4
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
12. Wird ein Produkt ortsfest angeschlossen, ist die Verbindung zwischen dem Schutzleiteranschluss vor
Ort und dem Geräteschutzleiter vor jeglicher anderer Verbindung herzustellen. Aufstellung und
Anschluss darf nur durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen.
13. Bei ortsfesten Geräten ohne eingebaute Sicherung, Selbstschalter oder ähnliche Schutzeinrichtung
muss der Versorgungskreis so abgesichert sein, dass alle Personen, die Zugang zum Produkt haben,
sowie das Produkt selbst ausreichend vor Schäden geschützt sind.
14. Jedes Produkt muss durch geeigneten Überspannungsschutz vor Überspannung (z.B. durch
Blitzschlag) geschützt werden. Andernfalls ist das bedienende Personal durch elektrischen Schlag
gefährdet.
15. Gegenstände, die nicht dafür vorgesehen sind, dürfen nicht in die Öffnungen des Gehäuses
eingebracht werden. Dies kann Kurzschlüsse im Produkt und/oder elektrische Schläge, Feuer oder
Verletzungen verursachen.
16. Sofern nicht anders spezifiziert, sind Produkte nicht gegen das Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten
geschützt, siehe auch Abschnitt "Betriebszustände und Betriebslagen", Punkt 1. Daher müssen die
Geräte vor Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten geschützt werden. Wird dies nicht beachtet, besteht Gefahr
durch elektrischen Schlag für den Benutzer oder Beschädigung des Produkts, was ebenfalls zur
Gefährdung von Personen führen kann.
17. Benutzen Sie das Produkt nicht unter Bedingungen, bei denen Kondensation in oder am Produkt
stattfinden könnte oder ggf. bereits stattgefunden hat, z.B. wenn das Produkt von kalter in warme
Umgebung bewegt wurde. Das Eindringen von Wasser erhöht das Risiko eines elektrischen
Schlages.
18. Trennen Sie das Produkt vor der Reinigung komplett von der Energieversorgung (z.B. speisendes
Netz oder Batterie). Nehmen Sie bei Geräten die Reinigung mit einem weichen, nicht fasernden
Staublappen vor. Verwenden Sie keinesfalls chemische Reinigungsmittel wie z.B. Alkohol, Aceton,
Nitroverdünnung.
Betrieb
1. Die Benutzung des Produkts erfordert spezielle Einweisung und hohe Konzentration während der
Benutzung. Es muss sichergestellt sein, dass Personen, die das Produkt bedienen, bezüglich ihrer
körperlichen, geistigen und seelischen Verfassung den Anforderungen gewachsen sind, da
andernfalls Verletzungen oder Sachschäden nicht auszuschließen sind. Es liegt in der Verantwortung
des Arbeitsgebers/Betreibers, geeignetes Personal für die Benutzung des Produkts auszuwählen.
2. Bevor Sie das Produkt bewegen oder transportieren, lesen und beachten Sie den Abschnitt
"Transport".
3. Wie bei allen industriell gefertigten Gütern kann die Verwendung von Stoffen, die Allergien
hervorrufen - so genannte Allergene (z.B. Nickel) - nicht generell ausgeschlossen werden. Sollten
beim Umgang mit R&S-Produkten allergische Reaktionen, z.B. Hautausschlag, häufiges Niesen,
Bindehautrötung oder Atembeschwerden auftreten, ist umgehend ein Arzt aufzusuchen, um die
Ursachen zu klären und Gesundheitsschäden bzw. -belastungen zu vermeiden.
4. Vor der mechanischen und/oder thermischen Bearbeitung oder Zerlegung des Produkts beachten Sie
unbedingt Abschnitt "Entsorgung", Punkt 1.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 5
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
5. Bei bestimmten Produkten, z.B. HF-Funkanlagen, können funktionsbedingt erhöhte elektromagnetische Strahlungen auftreten. Unter Berücksichtigung der erhöhten Schutzwürdigkeit des ungeborenen Lebens müssen Schwangere durch geeignete Maßnahmen geschützt werden. Auch Träger
von Herzschrittmachern können durch elektromagnetische Strahlungen gefährdet sein. Der
Arbeitgeber/Betreiber ist verpflichtet, Arbeitsstätten, bei denen ein besonderes Risiko einer Strahlenexposition besteht, zu beurteilen und zu kennzeichnen und mögliche Gefahren abzuwenden.
6. Im Falle eines Brandes entweichen ggf. giftige Stoffe (Gase, Flüssigkeiten etc.) aus dem Produkt, die
Gesundheitsschäden verursachen können. Daher sind im Brandfall geeignete Maßnahmen wie z.B.
Atemschutzmasken und Schutzkleidung zu verwenden.
7. Falls ein Laser-Produkt in ein R&S-Produkt integriert ist (z.B. CD/DVD-Laufwerk), dürfen keine
anderen Einstellungen oder Funktionen verwendet werden, als in der Produktdokumentation beschrieben, um Personenschäden zu vermeiden (z.B. durch Laserstrahl).
8. EMV Klassen (nach EN 55011 / CISPR 11; sinngemäß EN 55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
Gerät der Klasse A:
Ein Gerät, das sich für den Gebrauch in allen anderen Bereichen außer dem Wohnbereich und
solchen Bereichen eignet, die direkt an ein Niederspannungs-Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind,
das Wohngebäude versorgt.
Hinweis: Diese Einrichtung kann wegen möglicher auftretender leitungsgebundener als auch
gestrahlten Störgrößen im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen. In diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen.
Gerät der Klasse B:
Ein Gerät, das sich für den Betrieb im Wohnbereich sowie in solchen Bereichen eignet, die direkt an
ein Niederspannungs-Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind, das Wohngebäude versorgt.
Reparatur und Service
1. Das Produkt darf nur von dafür autorisiertem Fachpersonal geöffnet werden. Vor Arbeiten am Produkt
oder Öffnen des Produkts ist dieses von der Versorgungsspannung zu trennen, sonst besteht das
Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages.
2. Abgleich, Auswechseln von Teilen, Wartung und Reparatur darf nur von R&S-autorisierten
Elektrofachkräften ausgeführt werden. Werden sicherheitsrelevante Teile (z.B. Netzschalter,
Netztrafos oder Sicherungen) ausgewechselt, so dürfen diese nur durch Originalteile ersetzt werden.
Nach jedem Austausch von sicherheitsrelevanten Teilen ist eine Sicherheitsprüfung durchzuführen
(Sichtprüfung, Schutzleitertest, Isolationswiderstand-, Ableitstrommessung, Funktionstest). Damit wird
sichergestellt, dass die Sicherheit des Produkts erhalten bleibt.
Batterien und Akkumulatoren/Zellen
Werden die Hinweise zu Batterien und Akkumulatoren/Zellen nicht oder unzureichend beachtet, kann dies
Explosion, Brand und/oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen, unter Umständen mit Todesfolge,
verursachen. Die Handhabung von Batterien und Akkumulatoren mit alkalischen Elektrolyten (z.B.
Lithiumzellen) muss der EN 62133 entsprechen.
1. Zellen dürfen nicht zerlegt, geöffnet oder zerkleinert werden.
2. Zellen oder Batterien dürfen weder Hitze noch Feuer ausgesetzt werden. Die Lagerung im direkten
Sonnenlicht ist zu vermeiden. Zellen und Batterien sauber und trocken halten. Verschmutzte
Anschlüsse mit einem trockenen, sauberen Tuch reinigen.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 6
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
3. Zellen oder Batterien dürfen nicht kurzgeschlossen werden. Zellen oder Batterien dürfen nicht
gefahrbringend in einer Schachtel oder in einem Schubfach gelagert werden, wo sie sich gegenseitig
kurzschließen oder durch andere leitende Werkstoffe kurzgeschlossen werden können. Eine Zelle
oder Batterie darf erst aus ihrer Originalverpackung entnommen werden, wenn sie verwendet werden
soll.
4. Zellen oder Batterien dürfen keinen unzulässig starken, mechanischen Stößen ausgesetzt werden.
5. Bei Undichtheit einer Zelle darf die Flüssigkeit nicht mit der Haut in Berührung kommen oder in die
Augen gelangen. Falls es zu einer Berührung gekommen ist, den betroffenen Bereich mit reichlich
Wasser waschen und ärztliche Hilfe in Anspruch nehmen.
6. Werden Zellen oder Batterien, die alkalische Elektrolyte enthalten (z.B. Lithiumzellen), unsachgemäß
ausgewechselt oder geladen, besteht Explosionsgefahr. Zellen oder Batterien nur durch den entsprechenden R&S-Typ ersetzen (siehe Ersatzteilliste), um die Sicherheit des Produkts zu erhalten.
7. Zellen oder Batterien müssen wiederverwertet werden und dürfen nicht in den Restmüll gelangen.
Akkumulatoren oder Batterien, die Blei, Quecksilber oder Cadmium enthalten, sind Sonderabfall.
Beachten Sie hierzu die landesspezifischen Entsorgungs- und Recycling-Bestimmungen.
Transport
1. Das Produkt kann ein hohes Gewicht aufweisen. Daher muss es vorsichtig und ggf. unter
Verwendung eines geeigneten Hebemittels (z.B. Hubwagen) bewegt bzw. transportiert werden, um
Rückenschäden oder Verletzungen zu vermeiden.
2. Griffe an den Produkten sind eine Handhabungshilfe, die ausschließlich für den Transport des
Produkts durch Personen vorgesehen ist. Es ist daher nicht zulässig, Griffe zur Befestigung an bzw.
auf Transportmitteln, z.B. Kränen, Gabelstaplern, Karren etc. zu verwenden. Es liegt in Ihrer
Verantwortung, die Produkte sicher an bzw. auf geeigneten Transport- oder Hebemitteln zu
befestigen. Beachten Sie die Sicherheitsvorschriften des jeweiligen Herstellers eingesetzter
Transport- oder Hebemittel, um Personenschäden und Schäden am Produkt zu vermeiden.
3. Falls Sie das Produkt in einem Fahrzeug benutzen, liegt es in der alleinigen Verantwortung des
Fahrers, das Fahrzeug in sicherer und angemessener Weise zu führen. Der Hersteller übernimmt
keine Verantwortung für Unfälle oder Kollisionen. Verwenden Sie das Produkt niemals in einem sich
bewegenden Fahrzeug, sofern dies den Fahrzeugführer ablenken könnte. Sichern Sie das Produkt im
Fahrzeug ausreichend ab, um im Falle eines Unfalls Verletzungen oder Schäden anderer Art zu
verhindern.
Entsorgung
1. Batterien bzw. Akkumulatoren, die nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden dürfen, darf nach Ende
der Lebensdauer nur über eine geeignete Sammelstelle oder eine Rohde & SchwarzKundendienststelle entsorgt werden.
2. Am Ende der Lebensdauer des Produktes darf dieses Produkt nicht über den normalen Hausmüll
entsorgt werden, sondern muss getrennt gesammelt werden.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ein Entsorgungskonzept entwickelt und übernimmt die Pflichten
der Rücknahme- und Entsorgung für Hersteller innerhalb der EU in vollem Umfang. Wenden Sie sich
bitte an Ihre Rohde & Schwarz-Kundendienststelle, um das Produkt umweltgerecht zu entsorgen.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 7
Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise
3. Werden Produkte oder ihre Bestandteile über den bestimmungsgemäßen Betrieb hinaus mechanisch
und/oder thermisch bearbeitet, können ggf. gefährliche Stoffe (schwermetallhaltiger Staub wie z.B.
Blei, Beryllium, Nickel) freigesetzt werden. Die Zerlegung des Produkts darf daher nur von speziell
geschultem Fachpersonal erfolgen. Unsachgemäßes Zerlegen kann Gesundheitsschäden
hervorrufen. Die nationalen Vorschriften zur Entsorgung sind zu beachten.
4. Falls beim Umgang mit dem Produkt Gefahren- oder Betriebsstoffe entstehen, die speziell zu
entsorgen sind, z.B. regelmäßig zu wechselnde Kühlmittel oder Motorenöle, sind die
Sicherheitshinweise des Herstellers dieser Gefahren- oder Betriebsstoffe und die regional gültigen
Entsorgungsvorschriften einzuhalten. Beachten Sie ggf. auch die zugehörigen speziellen
Sicherheitshinweise in der Produktdokumentation. Die unsachgemäße Entsorgung von Gefahrenoder Betriebsstoffen kann zu Gesundheitsschäden von Personen und Umweltschäden führen.
Weitere Informationen zu Umweltschutz finden Sie auf der Rohde & Schwarz Home Page.
1171.0000.41 – 08
Seite 8
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
Lisez et respectez impérativement les instructions et consignes de sécurité suivantes
Les usines et sites du groupe Rohde & Schwarz veillent à la conformité des produits du groupe avec les
normes de sécurité en vigueur dans un souci constant de garantir aux clients le plus haut niveau de
sécurité possible. Nos produits ainsi que les accessoires nécessaires sont fabriqués et testés
conformément aux règles de sécurité en vigueur. Le respect de ces règles est vérifié régulièrement par
notre système d’assurance qualité. Le présent produit a été fabriqué et contrôlé conformément au
certificat de conformité CE ci-joint et a quitté l’usine dans un parfait état de sécurité. Pour le maintenir
dans cet état et en garantir une utilisation sans danger, l’utilisateur doit respecter l’ensemble des
consignes, remarques de sécurité et avertissements qui se trouvent dans ce manuel. Le groupe
Rohde & Schwarz se tient à votre disposition pour toutes questions relatives aux présentes consignes de
sécurité.
Il incombe à l’utilisateur d’employer ce produit de manière appropriée. Le produit est exclusivement
destiné à l’utilisation en industrie et en laboratoire et/ou, si cela a été expressément autorisé, également
aux travaux extérieurs ; il ne peut en aucun cas être utilisé à des fins pouvant causer des dommages
corporels ou matériels. L’exploitation du produit en dehors de son utilisation prévue ou le non-respect des
consignes du fabricant se font sous la responsabilité de l’utilisateur. Le fabricant décline toute
responsabilité en cas d’utilisation non conforme du produit.
Le produit est présumé faire l’objet d’une utilisation conforme lorsqu’il est utilisé conformément aux
consignes de la documentation produit correspondante et dans la limite de ses performances (voir fiche
technique, documentation, consignes de sécurité ci-après). L’utilisation du produit exige des compétences
en la matière et des connaissances de base de l’anglais. Par conséquent, le produit ne devra être utilisé
que par un personnel qualifié ou des personnes formées de manière approfondie et possédant les
compétences requises. Si, pour l’utilisation des produits Rohde & Schwarz, l’emploi d’un équipement
personnel de protection s’avère nécessaire, il en est fait mention dans la documentation produit à
l’emplacement correspondant. Conservez les consignes de sécurité fondamentales et la documentation
produit dans un lieu sûr et transmettez ces documents aux autres utilisateurs du produit.
La stricte observation des consignes de sécurité a pour but d’exclure des blessures ou dommages causés
par des dangers de toutes sortes. A cet effet, il est nécessaire de lire avec soin et de bien comprendre les
consignes de sécurité ci-dessous avant l’utilisation du produit et de les respecter lors de l’utilisation du
produit. Toutes les autres consignes de sécurité présentées à l’emplacement correspondant de la
documentation produit, par exemple, celles concernant la protection des personnes, doivent également
être impérativement respectées. Dans les présentes consignes de sécurité, toutes les marchandises
commercialisées par le groupe Rohde & Schwarz, notamment les appareils, les systèmes ainsi que les
accessoires, sont dénommés « produit ».
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 1
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
Symboles et marquages de sécurité
Symbole
Signification
Avis, source générale de danger
Symbole
Signification
MARCHE / ARRET (tension d’alimentation)
Se référer à la documentation produit
Attention lors de la manipulation d’appareils
ayant un poids élevé
Indicateur de veille
Risque de choc électrique
Courant continu (CC)
Avertissement, surface chaude
Courant alternatif (CA)
Borne de conducteur de protection
Courant continu/alternatif (CC/CA)
Borne de mise à la terre
L’appareil est conforme aux exigences de
sécurité du degré de protection II
(appareil entièrement protégé par isolation
double/renforcée).
Borne de mise à la masse du bâti ou du boîtier
Marquage UE pour batteries et accumulateurs.
L’appareil contient une batterie ou un
accumulateur. Ces pièces ne peuvent pas être
éliminées avec les déchets urbains non triés,
mais doivent faire l’objet d’une collecte
séparée.
Pour plus d’informations, voir la page 7.
Avis : prudence lors de la manipulation de
composants sensibles aux décharges
électrostatiques
Marquage UE pour la collecte séparée
d’équipements électriques et électroniques.
Les déchets d’équipements électriques et
électroniques ne peuvent pas être éliminés
avec les déchets urbains non triés, mais
doivent faire l’objet d’une collecte séparée.
Pour plus d’informations, voir la page 7.
Avertissement, rayon laser
Les produits laser sont munis d’avertissements
normalisés d’après leur catégorie laser.
En raison des caractéristiques de leur
rayonnement ainsi que de leur puissance
électromagnétique extrêmement concentrée,
les lasers peuvent causer des dommages
biologiques.
Pour plus d’informations, voir le chapitre
« Fonctionnement »", point 7.
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 2
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
Mots d’alerte et significations
Les mots d’alerte suivants sont utilisés dans la documentation produit pour avertir des risques et dangers.
Indique une situation dangereuse immédiate qui, si elle n’est pas
évitée, comporte un risque élevé de blessures graves ou
mortelles.
Indique une situation dangereuse possible qui, si elle n’est pas
évitée, comporte un risque modéré de blessures (graves) ou
mortelles.
Indique une situation dangereuse qui, si elle n’est pas évitée,
comporte un risque faible de blessures mineures ou modérées.
Indique la possibilité d’une fausse manœuvre susceptible
d’endommager le produit.
Ces mots d’alerte correspondent à la définition habituelle utilisée pour des applications civiles dans
l’espace économique européen. Des définitions divergentes peuvent cependant exister dans d’autres
espaces économiques ou dans le cadre d’applications militaires. Il faut donc veiller à ce que les mots
d’alerte décrits ici ne soient utilisés qu’en relation avec la documentation produit correspondante et
seulement avec le produit correspondant. L’utilisation des mots d’alerte en relation avec des produits ou
des documentations non correspondants peut conduire à des erreurs d’interprétation et par conséquent à
des dommages corporels ou matériels.
États et positions de fonctionnement
L’appareil ne doit être utilisé que dans les états et positions de fonctionnement indiqués par le fabricant.
Tout obstacle à la ventilation doit être empêché. Le non-respect des indications du fabricant peut
provoquer des chocs électriques, des incendies et/ou des blessures graves pouvant éventuellement
entraîner la mort. Pour tous les travaux, les règles locales et/ou nationales de sécurité et de prévention
des accidents doivent être respectées.
1. Sauf stipulations contraires, les produits Rohde & Schwarz répondent aux exigences ci-après :
faire fonctionner le produit avec le fond du boîtier toujours en bas, degré de protection IP 2X, degré de
pollution 2, catégorie de surtension 2, utilisation uniquement à l’intérieur, fonctionnement à une
altitude max. de 2000 m au-dessus du niveau de la mer, transport à une altitude max. de 4500 m audessus du niveau de la mer, tolérance de ±10 % pour la tension nominale et de ±5 % pour la
fréquence nominale.
2. Ne jamais placer le produit sur des surfaces, véhicules, dépôts ou tables non appropriés pour raisons
de stabilité ou de poids. Suivre toujours strictement les indications d’installation du fabricant pour le
montage et la fixation du produit sur des objets ou des structures (par exemple parois et étagères). En
cas d’installation non conforme à la documentation produit, il y a risque de blessures, voire de mort.
3. Ne jamais placer le produit sur des dispositifs générant de la chaleur (par exemple radiateurs et
appareils de chauffage soufflants). La température ambiante ne doit pas dépasser la température
maximale spécifiée dans la documentation produit ou dans la fiche technique. Une surchauffe du
produit peut provoquer des chocs électriques, des incendies et/ou des blessures graves pouvant
éventuellement entraîner la mort.
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 3
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
Sécurité électrique
Si les consignes relatives à la sécurité électrique ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment respectées, il peut
s’ensuivre des chocs électriques, des incendies et/ou des blessures graves pouvant éventuellement
entraîner la mort.
1. Avant chaque mise sous tension du produit, il faut s’assurer que la tension nominale réglée sur le
produit correspond à la tension nominale du réseau électrique. S’il est nécessaire de modifier le
réglage de la tension, il faut remplacer le fusible du produit, le cas échéant.
2. L’utilisation des produits du degré de protection I pourvus d’un câble d’alimentation mobile et d’un
connecteur n’est autorisée qu’avec des prises munies d’un contact de protection et d’un conducteur
de protection raccordé.
3. Toute déconnexion intentionnelle du conducteur de protection, dans le câble ou dans le produit luimême, est interdite. Elle entraîne un risque de choc électrique au niveau du produit. En cas
d’utilisation de câbles prolongateurs ou de multiprises, ceux-ci doivent être examinés régulièrement
quant à leur état de sécurité technique.
4. Si le produit n’est pas doté d’un interrupteur d’alimentation pour le couper du réseau électrique ou si
l’interrupteur d’alimentation disponible n’est pas approprié pour couper le produit du réseau électrique,
le connecteur mâle du câble de raccordement est à considérer comme dispositif de séparation.
Le dispositif de séparation doit être à tout moment facilement accessible. Si, par exemple, le
connecteur d’alimentation sert de dispositif de séparation, la longueur du câble de raccordement ne
doit pas dépasser 3 m.
Les commutateurs fonctionnels ou électroniques ne sont pas appropriés pour couper l’appareil du
réseau électrique. Si des produits sans interrupteur d’alimentation sont intégrés dans des bâtis ou
systèmes, le dispositif de séparation doit être reporté au niveau du système.
5. Ne jamais utiliser le produit si le câble d’alimentation est endommagé. Vérifier régulièrement le parfait
état du câble d’alimentation. Prendre les mesures préventives appropriées et opter pour des types de
pose tels que le câble d’alimentation ne puisse pas être endommagé et que personne ne puisse subir
de préjudice, par exemple en trébuchant sur le câble ou par des chocs électriques.
6. L’utilisation des produits est uniquement autorisée sur des réseaux d’alimentation de type TN/TT
protégés par des fusibles d’une intensité max. de 16 A (pour toute intensité supérieure, consulter le
groupe Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Ne pas brancher le connecteur dans des prises d’alimentation sales ou poussiéreuses. Enfoncer
fermement le connecteur jusqu’au bout de la prise. Le non-respect de cette mesure peut provoquer
des étincelles, incendies et/ou blessures.
8. Ne pas surcharger les prises, les câbles prolongateurs ou les multiprises, cela pouvant provoquer des
incendies ou chocs électriques.
9. En cas de mesures sur les circuits électriques d’une tension efficace > 30 V, prendre les précautions
nécessaires pour éviter tout risque (par exemple équipement de mesure approprié, fusibles, limitation
de courant, coupe-circuit, isolation, etc.).
10. En cas d’interconnexion avec des équipements informatiques comme par exemple un PC ou un
ordinateur industriel, veiller à ce que ces derniers soient conformes aux normes IEC 60950-1 /
EN 60950-1 ou IEC 61010-1 / EN 61010-1 en vigueur.
11. Sauf autorisation expresse, il est interdit de retirer le couvercle ou toute autre pièce du boîtier lorsque
le produit est en cours de service. Les câbles et composants électriques seraient ainsi accessibles, ce
qui peut entraîner des blessures, des incendies ou des dégâts sur le produit.
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 4
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
12. Si un produit est connecté de façon stationnaire, établir avant toute autre connexion le raccordement
du conducteur de protection local et du conducteur de protection du produit. L’installation et le
raccordement ne peuvent être effectués que par un électricien ou électronicien qualifié.
13. Sur les appareils stationnaires sans fusible ni disjoncteur automatique ou dispositif de protection
similaire intégrés, le circuit d’alimentation doit être sécurisé de sorte que toutes les personnes ayant
accès au produit et le produit lui-même soient suffisamment protégés contre tout dommage.
14. Chaque produit doit être protégé de manière appropriée contre les éventuelles surtensions (par
exemple dues à un coup de foudre). Sinon, les utilisateurs sont exposés à des risques de choc
électrique.
15. Ne jamais introduire d’objets non prévus à cet effet dans les ouvertures du boîtier, étant donné que
cela peut entraîner des courts-circuits dans le produit et/ou des chocs électriques, incendies ou
blessures.
16. Sauf spécification contraire, les produits ne sont pas protégés contre l’infiltration de liquides, voir aussi
la section « États et positions de fonctionnement », point 1. Il faut donc protéger les produits contre
l’infiltration de liquides. La non-observation de cette consigne entraîne le risque de choc électrique
pour l’utilisateur ou d’endommagement du produit, ce qui peut également mettre les personnes en
danger.
17. Ne pas utiliser le produit dans des conditions pouvant occasionner ou ayant déjà occasionné, le cas
échéant, des condensations dans ou sur le produit, par exemple lorsque celui-ci est déplacé d’un
environnement froid dans un environnement chaud. L’infiltration d’eau augmente le risque de choc
électrique.
18. Avant le nettoyage, débrancher le produit de l’alimentation (par exemple réseau électrique ou
batterie). Pour le nettoyage des appareils, utiliser un chiffon doux non pelucheux. N’utiliser en aucun
cas de produit de nettoyage chimique, tel que de l’alcool, de l’acétone ou un diluant nitrocellulosique.
Fonctionnement
1. L’utilisation du produit exige une formation spécifique ainsi qu’une grande concentration. Il est
impératif que les personnes qui utilisent le produit présent les aptitudes physiques, mentales et
psychiques requises, vu qu’autrement des dommages corporels ou matériels ne peuvent pas être
exclus. Le choix du personnel qualifié pour l’utilisation du produit est sous la responsabilité de
l’employeur/l’exploitant.
2. Avant de déplacer ou de transporter le produit, lire et respecter la section « Transport ».
3. Comme pour tous les biens produits de façon industrielle, l’utilisation de matériaux pouvant causer
des allergies (allergènes, comme par exemple le nickel) ne peut être totalement exclue. Si, lors de
l’utilisation de produits Rohde & Schwarz, des réactions allergiques surviennent, telles qu’éruption
cutanée, éternuements fréquents, rougeur de la conjonctive ou difficultés respiratoires, il faut
immédiatement consulter un médecin pour en clarifier la cause et éviter toute atteinte à la santé.
4. Avant le traitement mécanique et/ou thermique ou le démontage du produit, il faut impérativement
observer la section « Élimination des déchets », point 1.
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 5
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
5. Selon les fonctions, certains produits, tels que des systèmes de radiocommunication RF, peuvent
produire des niveaux élevés de rayonnement électromagnétique. Étant donné la vulnérabilité de
l’enfant à naître, les femmes enceintes doivent être protégées par des mesures appropriées. Les
porteurs de stimulateurs cardiaques peuvent également être menacés par les rayonnements
électromagnétiques. L’employeur/l’exploitant est tenu d’évaluer et de repérer les lieux de travail
soumis à un risque particulier d’exposition aux rayonnements et de prévenir les dangers éventuels.
6. En cas d’incendie, il se peut que le produit dégage des matières toxiques (gaz, liquides, etc.)
susceptibles de nuire à la santé. Il faut donc, en cas d’incendie, prendre des mesures adéquates
comme par exemple le port de masques respiratoires et de vêtements de protection.
7. Si un produit laser est intégré dans un produit Rohde & Schwarz (par exemple lecteur CD/DVD), il ne
faut pas utiliser de réglages ou fonctions autres que ceux décrits dans la documentation produit pour
éviter tout dommage corporel (par exemple causé par rayon laser).
8. Classes CEM (selon EN 55011 / CISPR 11 ; selon EN 55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32 par
analogie)
 Appareil de la classe A :
Appareil approprié à un usage dans tous les environnements autres que l’environnement
résidentiel et les environnements raccordés directement à un réseau d’alimentation basse tension
qui alimente des bâtiments résidentiels.
Remarque : ces appareils peuvent provoquer des perturbations radioélectriques dans
l’environnement résidentiel en raison de perturbations conduites ou rayonnées. Dans ce cas, on
peut exiger que l’exploitant mette en œuvre de mesures appropriées pour éliminer ces
perturbations.
 Appareil de la classe B :
Appareil approprié à un usage dans l’environnement résidentiel ainsi que dans les
environnements raccordés directement à un réseau d’alimentation basse tension qui alimente des
bâtiments résidentiels.
Réparation et service après-vente
1. Le produit ne doit être ouvert que par un personnel qualifié et autorisé. Avant de travailler sur le
produit ou de l’ouvrir, il faut le couper de la tension d’alimentation ; sinon il y a risque de choc
électrique.
2. Les travaux d’ajustement, le remplacement des pièces, la maintenance et la réparation ne doivent
être effectués que par des électroniciens qualifiés et autorisés par Rohde & Schwarz. En cas de
remplacement de pièces concernant la sécurité (notamment interrupteur d’alimentation,
transformateur d’alimentation réseau ou fusibles), celles-ci ne doivent être remplacées que par des
pièces d’origine. Après chaque remplacement de pièces concernant la sécurité, une vérification de
sécurité doit être effectuée (contrôle visuel, vérification du conducteur de protection, mesure de la
résistance d’isolement et du courant de fuite, essai de fonctionnement). Cela permet d’assurer le
maintien de la sécurité du produit.
Batteries et accumulateurs/cellules
Si les instructions concernant les batteries et accumulateurs/cellules ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment
respectées, cela peut provoquer des explosions, des incendies et/ou des blessures graves pouvant
entraîner la mort. La manipulation de batteries et accumulateurs contenant des électrolytes alcalins (par
exemple cellules de lithium) doit être conforme à la norme EN 62133.
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 6
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
1. Les cellules ne doivent être ni démontées, ni ouvertes, ni réduites en morceaux.
2. Ne jamais exposer les cellules ou batteries à la chaleur ou au feu. Ne pas les stocker dans un endroit
où elles sont exposées au rayonnement direct du soleil. Tenir les cellules et batteries au sec. Nettoyer
les raccords sales avec un chiffon sec et propre.
3. Ne jamais court-circuiter les cellules ou batteries. Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas être
gardées dans une boîte ou un tiroir où elles peuvent se court-circuiter mutuellement ou être courtcircuitées par d’autres matériaux conducteurs. Une cellule ou batterie ne doit être retirée de son
emballage d’origine que lorsqu’on l’utilise.
4. Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas être exposées à des chocs mécaniques de force non
admissible.
5. En cas de manque d’étanchéité d’une cellule, le liquide ne doit pas entrer en contact avec la peau ou
les yeux. S’il y a contact, rincer abondamment à l’eau l’endroit concerné et consulter un médecin.
6. Il y a danger d’explosion en cas de remplacement ou chargement incorrect des cellules ou batteries
qui contiennent des électrolytes alcalins (par exemple cellules de lithium). Remplacer les cellules ou
batteries uniquement par le type Rohde & Schwarz correspondant (voir la liste des pièces de
rechange) pour maintenir la sécurité du produit.
7. Il faut recycler les cellules ou batteries et il est interdit de les éliminer comme déchets normaux. Les
accumulateurs ou batteries qui contiennent du plomb, du mercure ou du cadmium sont des déchets
spéciaux. Observer les règles nationales d’élimination et de recyclage.
Transport
1. Le produit peut avoir un poids élevé. Il faut donc le déplacer ou le transporter avec précaution et en
utilisant le cas échéant un moyen de levage approprié (par exemple, chariot élévateur) pour éviter des
dommages au dos ou des blessures.
2. Les poignées des produits sont une aide de manipulation exclusivement réservée au transport du
produit par des personnes. Il est donc proscrit d’utiliser ces poignées pour attacher le produit à ou sur
des moyens de transport, tels que grues, chariots et chariots élévateurs, etc. Vous êtes responsable
de la fixation sûre des produits à ou sur des moyens de transport et de levage appropriés. Observer
les consignes de sécurité du fabricant des moyens de transport ou de levage utilisés pour éviter des
dommages corporels et des dégâts sur le produit.
3. L’utilisation du produit dans un véhicule se fait sous l’unique responsabilité du conducteur qui doit
piloter le véhicule de manière sûre et appropriée. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas
d’accidents ou de collisions. Ne jamais utiliser le produit dans un véhicule en mouvement si cela
pouvait détourner l’attention du conducteur. Sécuriser suffisamment le produit dans le véhicule pour
empêcher des blessures ou dommages de tout type en cas d’accident.
Élimination des déchets
1. Au terme de leur durée de vie, les batteries ou accumulateurs qui ne peuvent pas être éliminés avec
les déchets ménagers peuvent uniquement être éliminés par des points de collecte appropriés ou par
un centre de service après-vente Rohde & Schwarz.
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 7
Consignes de sécurité fondamentales
2. Au terme de sa durée de vie, un produit ne peut pas être éliminé avec les déchets ménagers
normaux, mais doit être collecté séparément.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG a développé un concept d’élimination des déchets et assume
toutes les obligations en matière de reprise et d’élimination, valables pour les fabricants au sein de
l’UE. Veuillez vous adresser à votre centre de service après-vente Rohde & Schwarz pour éliminer le
produit de manière écologique.
3. Si les produits ou leurs composants sont travaillés mécaniquement et/ou thermiquement au-delà de
l’utilisation prévue, ils peuvent, le cas échéant, libérer des substances dangereuses (poussières
contenant des métaux lourds comme par exemple du plomb, du béryllium ou du nickel). Le
démontage du produit ne doit donc être effectué que par un personnel qualifié et spécialement formé.
Le démontage inadéquat peut nuire à la santé. Les règles nationales concernant l’élimination des
déchets doivent être observées.
4. Si, lors de l’utilisation du produit, des substances dangereuses ou combustibles exigeant une
élimination spéciale sont dégagées, comme par exemple liquides de refroidissement ou huiles
moteurs qui sont à changer régulièrement, les consignes de sécurité du fabricant de ces substances
dangereuses ou combustibles ainsi que les règles sur l’élimination en vigueur au niveau régional
doivent être respectées. Les consignes de sécurité spéciales correspondantes dans la documentation
produit doivent également être respectées, le cas échéant. L’élimination non conforme des
substances dangereuses ou combustibles peut provoquer des atteintes à la santé et des dommages
écologiques.
Pour plus d’informations concernant la protection de l’environnement, voir la page d’accueil de
Rohde & Schwarz.
1171.0000.43 – 08
Page 8
Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support
Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a
solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz
equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades
To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your
instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.
Europe, Africa, Middle East
Phone +49 89 4129 12345
[email protected]
North America
Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)
[email protected]
Latin America
Phone +1-410-910-7988
[email protected]
Asia/Pacific
Phone +65 65 13 04 88
[email protected]
China
Phone +86-800-810-8228 /
+86-400-650-5896
[email protected]
1171.0200.22-06.00
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Contents
Contents
1 Getting Started....................................................................................... 9
1.1
Preface........................................................................................................................... 9
1.1.1
Key Features...................................................................................................................9
1.1.2
Input Isolation..................................................................................................................9
1.1.3
Measurement Categories..............................................................................................10
1.1.4
Documentation Overview.............................................................................................. 11
1.1.5
Regulatory Information..................................................................................................12
1.2
Preparing for Use........................................................................................................ 13
1.2.1
Unpacking the Instrument............................................................................................. 13
1.2.2
Inserting and Charging the Battery............................................................................... 14
1.2.3
Powering On/Off............................................................................................................16
1.2.4
Using the Tilt Stand.......................................................................................................16
1.2.5
EMI Suppression...........................................................................................................17
1.3
Instrument Tour...........................................................................................................18
1.3.1
Front View..................................................................................................................... 18
1.3.2
Top View....................................................................................................................... 20
1.3.3
Right View..................................................................................................................... 21
1.3.4
Left View....................................................................................................................... 23
1.3.5
Display Overview.......................................................................................................... 23
1.4
Operating Basics.........................................................................................................24
1.4.1
Accessing the Functionality...........................................................................................24
1.4.2
Selecting the Mode....................................................................................................... 33
1.4.3
Displaying an Unknown Signal......................................................................................34
1.4.4
Getting Information and Help........................................................................................ 34
1.5
Maintenance................................................................................................................ 37
1.5.1
Cleaning........................................................................................................................ 37
1.5.2
Data Storage and Security............................................................................................ 37
1.5.3
Storing and Packing...................................................................................................... 38
2 Waveform Setup...................................................................................39
2.1
Connecting Probes..................................................................................................... 39
2.2
Vertical Setup.............................................................................................................. 40
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
3
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Contents
2.3
Horizontal Setup..........................................................................................................43
2.4
Acquisition Control.....................................................................................................45
2.5
Trigger..........................................................................................................................47
2.5.1
General Trigger Settings............................................................................................... 47
2.5.2
Edge Trigger................................................................................................................. 50
2.5.3
Glitch Trigger.................................................................................................................51
2.5.4
Width Trigger.................................................................................................................52
2.5.5
Video/TV Trigger........................................................................................................... 53
2.5.6
Pattern Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)................................................................................... 57
2.5.7
State Trigger (R&S RTH-K19).......................................................................................59
2.5.8
Runt Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)....................................................................................... 60
2.5.9
Slew Rate Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)...............................................................................62
2.5.10
Data2Clock Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)............................................................................ 64
2.5.11
Serial Pattern Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)......................................................................... 65
2.5.12
Timeout Trigger (R&S RTH-K19).................................................................................. 67
2.5.13
Interval Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)................................................................................... 68
2.5.14
Window Trigger (R&S RTH-K19).................................................................................. 70
2.5.15
Protocol Trigger (R&S RTH-K1 and R&S RTH-K2)...................................................... 71
3 Waveform Analysis.............................................................................. 72
3.1
Zoom............................................................................................................................ 72
3.2
Automatic Measurements.......................................................................................... 74
3.2.1
Measurement Results................................................................................................... 74
3.2.2
Measurement Types..................................................................................................... 74
3.2.3
Measurement Settings.................................................................................................. 79
3.3
Cursor Measurements................................................................................................ 80
3.3.1
Cursor Types and Results.............................................................................................80
3.3.2
Settings for Cursor Measurements............................................................................... 82
3.4
Mathematics................................................................................................................ 84
3.5
Reference Waveforms................................................................................................ 86
3.5.1
Settings for Reference Waveforms............................................................................... 86
3.5.2
Waveform Files............................................................................................................. 87
3.6
XY-Diagram..................................................................................................................89
3.7
History (Option R&S RTH-K15).................................................................................. 90
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
4
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Contents
3.7.1
History Settings............................................................................................................. 91
3.7.2
Displaying History Data.................................................................................................92
3.7.3
Analyzing History Data..................................................................................................94
4 Mask Testing........................................................................................ 95
4.1
Accessing the Mask Mode......................................................................................... 95
4.2
Mask Test Results.......................................................................................................95
4.3
Running Mask Tests................................................................................................... 96
4.4
Mask Settings.............................................................................................................. 97
5 Multimeter Measurements.................................................................100
5.1
Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004)........................................................................................ 100
5.1.1
Accessing the Meter Mode..........................................................................................100
5.1.2
Display and Control.....................................................................................................100
5.1.3
Running Voltmeter Measurements..............................................................................103
5.1.4
Voltmeter Settings.......................................................................................................103
5.2
Digital Multimeter (R&S RTH1002)...........................................................................105
5.2.1
Accessing the Meter Mode..........................................................................................106
5.2.2
Display and Control.....................................................................................................106
5.2.3
Running Multimeter Measurements............................................................................ 107
5.2.4
Settings....................................................................................................................... 107
6 Data Logging...................................................................................... 110
6.1
Accessing the Logger Mode.................................................................................... 110
6.2
Logger Display.......................................................................................................... 110
6.3
Logging Data............................................................................................................. 111
6.4
Logger Settings.........................................................................................................112
6.5
Analyzing Logged Data............................................................................................ 114
6.5.1
Cursor......................................................................................................................... 114
6.5.2
Zoom........................................................................................................................... 116
6.5.3
Logger Statistics..........................................................................................................118
6.5.4
Loading Logged Data..................................................................................................118
6.5.5
Deleting Logged Data................................................................................................. 119
6.5.6
Exporting Logged Data .............................................................................................. 119
7 Protocol Analysis...............................................................................120
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
5
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Contents
7.1
General Protocol Settings........................................................................................ 120
7.2
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1).........................................................................................121
7.2.1
The I²C Protocol.......................................................................................................... 121
7.2.2
I2C Configuration Settings.......................................................................................... 123
7.2.3
I2C Trigger Settings.................................................................................................... 123
7.3
SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1).........................................................................................126
7.3.1
The SPI Protocol......................................................................................................... 126
7.3.2
SPI Configuration Settings.......................................................................................... 127
7.3.3
SPI Trigger Settings.................................................................................................... 128
7.4
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)............................................. 130
7.4.1
The UART Interface.................................................................................................... 130
7.4.2
UART Configuration Settings...................................................................................... 131
7.4.3
UART Trigger Settings................................................................................................ 133
8 Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)................................................. 135
8.1
Logic Analyzer Settings........................................................................................... 135
9 Documenting Results........................................................................ 138
9.1
Using USB Flash Drive............................................................................................. 138
9.2
Instrument Settings.................................................................................................. 138
9.2.1
Using Fast Settings..................................................................................................... 139
9.2.2
Saving and Loading Savesets.....................................................................................139
9.3
Screenshots...............................................................................................................141
9.3.1
Screenshot Settings.................................................................................................... 141
9.4
Logger Records.........................................................................................................142
10 General Instrument Setup................................................................. 143
10.1
Instrument Settings.................................................................................................. 143
10.2
Selfalignment.............................................................................................................144
10.3
Setting the Date, Time and Language..................................................................... 146
10.4
Options.......................................................................................................................147
10.4.1
Activating Options....................................................................................................... 149
10.5
Updating the Firmware............................................................................................. 150
10.6
Display Settings........................................................................................................ 151
11 Network Connections........................................................................ 153
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
6
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Contents
11.1
LAN Connection........................................................................................................ 153
11.2
USB connection........................................................................................................ 155
11.3
Wireless LAN Connection (Option R&S RTH-K200).............................................. 155
11.4
Web Interface (Option R&S RTH-K201)...................................................................157
12 Remote Control Commands..............................................................159
12.1
Conventions used in Command Description......................................................... 159
12.2
Mode...........................................................................................................................159
12.3
Waveform Setup........................................................................................................160
12.3.1
Automatic Setup..........................................................................................................160
12.3.2
Vertical Setup..............................................................................................................160
12.3.3
Horizontal Setup..........................................................................................................164
12.3.4
Acquisition Control...................................................................................................... 166
12.3.5
Trigger.........................................................................................................................168
12.4
Waveform Analysis................................................................................................... 187
12.4.1
Zoom........................................................................................................................... 187
12.4.2
Automatic Measurements........................................................................................... 188
12.4.3
Cursor Measurements.................................................................................................191
12.4.4
Math Waveforms......................................................................................................... 195
12.4.5
Reference Waveforms................................................................................................ 196
12.4.6
History (Option R&S RTH-K15)...................................................................................197
12.5
Mask Testing............................................................................................................. 200
12.5.1
Mask Definition............................................................................................................200
12.5.2
Mask Test....................................................................................................................202
12.6
Multimeter Measurements........................................................................................204
12.7
Data Logging............................................................................................................. 206
12.7.1
Logger Settings........................................................................................................... 206
12.7.2
Cursor in Logger Mode............................................................................................... 208
12.7.3
Zoom in Logger mode................................................................................................. 210
12.7.4
Logger Statistics .........................................................................................................211
12.8
Protocol Analysis......................................................................................................214
12.8.1
General Protocol Settings........................................................................................... 214
12.8.2
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1).......................................................................................... 215
12.8.3
SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1).......................................................................................... 222
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
7
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Contents
12.8.4
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2).............................................. 223
12.9
Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)........................................................................ 226
12.10
Documenting Results............................................................................................... 229
12.10.1
Screenshots................................................................................................................ 229
12.11
Instrument Settings.................................................................................................. 230
Annex.................................................................................................. 232
A SCPI Command Structure................................................................. 232
A.1
Syntax for Common Commands............................................................................. 232
A.2
Syntax for Device-Specific Commands.................................................................. 233
A.3
SCPI Parameters....................................................................................................... 235
A.4
Overview of Syntax Elements.................................................................................. 238
A.5
Structure of a command line....................................................................................239
A.6
Responses to Queries.............................................................................................. 239
B Command Sequence and Synchronization..................................... 241
B.1
Preventing Overlapping Execution......................................................................... 241
List of Commands..............................................................................244
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
8
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preface
1 Getting Started
1.1 Preface
1.1.1 Key Features
The R&S RTH is the perfect multi-purpose tool for the lab and in the field. Outstanding
key features are:
●
Full isolation of all channels and interfaces
●
CAT IV 600 V / CAT III 1000 V safety rating
●
Bandwidth 60 MHz to 500 MHz with 5 GS/s sampling rate
●
Acquisition speed up to 50.000 waveforms per second
●
2 mV/div sensitivity
●
Up to 200 V offset range
●
33 automatic measurement functions
●
Full operation using touch or keypad
●
Wireless LAN and Ethernet for web based remote control and quick data access
(optional)
The R&S RTH combines:
●
Lab performance oscilloscope
●
Logic analyzer with 8 digital inputs (optional)
●
Protocol analyzer with trigger and decode (optional)
●
Data logger
●
Digital multimeter (R&S RTH1002)
1.1.2 Input Isolation
The instrument has independently floating isolated inputs. Each input channel has its
own signal input and its own reference input. Each input channel is electrically isolated
from the other input channels. Therefore, each reference of the used inputs must be
connected to a reference voltage. Furthermore, input channels are electrically isolated
from the communication ports and the power adapter input.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
9
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preface
Figure 1-1: Isolation scheme of the R&S RTH
The input isolation has several advantages:
●
You can measure independently floating signals simultaneously.
●
The risk of causing a short circuit while measuring multiple signals is reduced substantially.
●
When measuring signals with different grounds, the induced ground currents are
kept to a minimum.
1.1.3 Measurement Categories
To ensure safe operation of measurement instruments, IEC 61010-2-030 defines particular safety requirements for testing and measuring circuits. The standard introduces
measurement categories that rate instruments on their ability to resist short transient
overvoltages that occur in addition to the working voltage of the instrument and can
exceed the working voltage many times over.
Measurement categories are distinguished as follows:
●
O - Instruments without rated measurement category
For measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to mains, for example, electronics, circuits powered by batteries, and specially protected secondary
circuits. This measurement category is also known as CAT I.
●
CAT II:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
10
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preface
For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low-voltage
installation by a standard socket outlet, for example, household appliances and
portable tools.
●
CAT III:
For measurements performed in the building installation, such as junction boxes,
circuit breakers, distribution boards, and equipment with permanent connection to
the fixed installation.
●
CAT IV:
For measurements performed at the source of the low-voltage installation, such as
electricity meters and primary overcurrent protection devices.
Figure 1-2: Examples of measurement categories
The higher the category, the higher the expected transient overvoltage. Overvoltages
can overload a circuit and cause electrical and physical damage. Therefore, use the
measurement instrument only in electrical environments for which the instrument is
rated.
The measurement categories correspond to the overvoltage categories of the
IEC60664 standards. Working voltages stated in context with measurement categories
are always specified as effective voltages V (RMS) against earth ground.
1.1.4 Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the R&S RTH consists of the following parts:
●
Instrument Help
The instrument help is part of the instrument's firmware. It offers quick, contextsensitive access to the complete information directly on the instrument.
●
Basic Safety Instructions
This brochure provides safety instructions as well as operating conditions and further important information. The brochure is delivered with the instrument in printed
form.
●
Getting Started
The Getting Started manual provides the information needed to set up and start
working with the instrument, and describes basic operations. The English edition of
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
11
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preface
this manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form. Editions in other languages, as well as newest version of the English one, are available on the product
website.
●
User Manual
The user manual describes all instrument modes and functions in detail. It also provides an introduction to remote control and a complete description of the remote
control commands with programming examples. The newest version of the manual
is available in English on the R&S RTH product website at www.rohdeschwarz.com/product/rth.html > "Downloads > Manuals".
●
Data Sheet
The data sheet contains the complete instrument specification. It also lists the
options and their order numbers as well as optional accessories. The data sheet is
available on the R&S RTH product website at www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/
rth.html > "Downloads" > "Brochures and Data Sheets".
●
Calibration Certificate
The document is available on https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com/calcert.
●
CE Declaration of Conformity
The document is available on www.rohde-schwarz.com/en/products/test-measurement/oscilloscopes/pg_overview_63663.html.
●
Open Source Acknowledgment
The Open Source Acknowledgment document provides verbatim license text of
open source software that is used in the instrument's firmware. It is available on the
R&S RTH website at www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/rth.html > "Downloads" >
"Firmware", and it can be read directly on the instrument.
1.1.5 Regulatory Information
Part 15 of the FCC and RSS-210 of IC Rules
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
●
this device may not cause harmful interference, and
●
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
●
l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
●
l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by
Rohde & Schwarz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
12
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
1.2 Preparing for Use
This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R&S RTH for
the first time.
Shock hazard caused by high voltages
The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent electric shock, fire,
personal injury, or damage.
●
Do not open the instrument casing.
●
Do not use the instrument if the instrument casing, the display or any probe or
accessory are damaged. If you detect or suspect any damage, have the instrument
or accessory inspected by qualified service personnel.
●
Use only specified probes and accessories that comply with the measurement category of your measurement task.
If you use other than Rohde & Schwarz accessories, make sure that they are suitable to the instrument and the measurement task.
●
Do not operate the instrument in wet, damp or explosive atmospheres.
Make sure that all connectors are completely dry before connecting the inputs.
●
Voltages higher than 30 V RMS or 42 V peak or 60 V DC are regarded as hazardous contact voltages. Make sure that only electrically skilled persons may use the
R&S RTH for measurements on hazardous contact voltages because these working conditions require special education and experience to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity can create.
●
Observe the operating conditions specified in the data sheet. Note that the general
safety instructions also contain information on operating conditions that will prevent
damage to the instrument.
●
Read and observe the "Basic Safety Instructions" delivered as a printed brochure
with the instrument. In addition, read and observe the safety instructions in the following sections.
1.2.1 Unpacking the Instrument
When you receive your shipping package, unpack and inspect the package and its
contents for damage.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
13
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
1. Inspect the package for damage.
If the packaging material shows any signs of stress, notify the carrier as well as
your Rohde & Schwarz service center. Keep the package and cushioning material
for inspection. Keep a damaged package and the cushioning material until the contents have been checked for completeness and the instrument has been tested.
2. Unpack the handheld scope and the accessories and check the contents for completeness, see "Package contents" on page 14.
If anything is missing, contact your Rohde & Schwarz service center.
3. Inspect the handheld scope and the accessories.
If there is any damage or defect, or if the R&S RTH does not operate properly,
notify your Rohde & Schwarz service center.
Packing material
Retain the original packing material. If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped at a later date, you can use the material to protect the control elements and connectors.
Package contents
The delivery package contains the following items:
●
R&S RTH handheld scope
●
4 Gbyte microSD card, installed in the battery compartment
●
Power adapter with cable and adapter set for various socket types
●
Battery pack
●
R&S RT-ZI10 probes (2x for R&S RTH1002; 4x for R&S RTH1004)
●
DMM test leads (only for R&S RTH1002)
●
Hand strap, attached on the handheld scope
●
Printed "Getting Started" manual and "Basic Safety Instructions" brochure
Optional accessories and their order numbers are listed in the data sheet.
1.2.2 Inserting and Charging the Battery
Before you can use the handheld scope for the first time, insert the battery pack and
charge it.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
14
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
Risk of electrical shock during battery replacement
●
Disconnect power supply, probes, test leads and all other cables before opening
the battery cover.
●
Use only the specified Li-Ion battery pack, which is delivered with the instrument.
You can order additional battery packs at Rohde & Schwarz, see Data Sheet for
order number.
●
Do not operate the instrument with the battery cover open.
●
Use only the specified power adapter, which is delivered with the instrument.
1. Fold out the tilt stand on the back of the instrument.
2. Screw open the battery cover.
3. Insert the battery pack.
4. Screw down the battery cover.
5. Connect the power adapter to the connector on the left side of the scope, and fully
charge the battery. Charging may take a few hours.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
15
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
If the instrument is on, the battery status is shown on the display.
Replace used batteries periodically by new batteries after 24 months of usage.
Observe the safety regulations in the "Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells" chapter in the "Basis Safety Instructions" brochure, which is delivered with the instrument.
1.2.3 Powering On/Off
► Press the
POWER key to switch the instrument on or off.
The POWER key lights up in green color if power is on.
1.2.4 Using the Tilt Stand
The R&S RTH has a tilt stand for proper handling while the scope is placed on a table.
► Pull the tilt stand as shown below.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
16
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Preparing for Use
1.2.5 EMI Suppression
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) may affect the measurement results.
To suppress generated Electromagnetic Interference:
●
Use suitable shielded cables of high quality. For example use double-shielded RF
and LAN cables.
●
Always terminate open cable ends.
●
Note the EMC classification in the data sheet.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
17
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
1.3 Instrument Tour
1.3.1 Front View
Figure 1-3: Front panel of the R&S RTH1002
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Touch display
Waveform setup with AUTOSET, reset to default with PRESET
Analysis functions
Mode selection
Save/Recall
Instrument settings
Power on/off
Navigation controls
Horizontal settings
Run/stop acquisition and trigger settings
Acquisition settings
Screenshot and documentation output
Channels and vertical settings
Multimeter measurements
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
18
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Figure 1-4: Front panel of the R&S RTH1004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Touch display
Waveform setup with AUTOSET, reset to default with PRESET
Analysis functions
Mode selection
Save/Recall
Instrument settings
Power on/off
Navigation controls
Horizontal settings
Run/stop acquisition and trigger settings
Acquisition settings
Screenshot and documentation output
Channels and vertical settings
For a description of the keys, see Chapter 1.4.1.3, "Using Front Panel Keys",
on page 31.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
19
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
1.3.2 Top View
The R&S RTH1002 has two BNC input connectors CH1 and CH2, and two 4mm
banana plug inputs for various multimeter measurements. The channel inputs have
double channel-to-channel isolation that allows for independent floating measurements
at each input. The DMM input is fully isolated from scope inputs, interfaces and
ground.
Figure 1-5: Top view of R&S RTH1002
The R&S RTH1004 has four BNC input connectors CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4. The channel
inputs have double channel-to-channel isolation that allow for independent floating
measurements at each input.
See also: Chapter 1.1.2, "Input Isolation", on page 9.
Figure 1-6: Top view of R&S RTH1004
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
20
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
Shock hazard caused by high voltages
To avoid electrical shock and personal injury, and to prevent damage to the instrument
or any other products connected to it, observe the following:
●
Do not apply input voltages above the rating of the instrument and the accessories.
●
Use only probes, test leads, and adapters that comply with the measurement category (CAT) of your measurement task.
●
Test leads and measurement accessories used for multimeter measurements on a
live mains circuit must be rated for CAT III or CAT IV according to IEC 61010-031.
The voltage of the measured circuit must not exceed the rated voltage value.
Maximum input voltage:
●
At BNC inputs: CAT IV 300 V
●
With probe R&S RT-ZI10 or R&S RT-ZI11: CAT IV 600 V, CAT III 1000 V
●
Meter input: CAT IV 600 V; CAT III 1000 V
Voltage ratings are V RMS (50 to 60 Hz) for AC sine wave and V DC for DC applications.
Risk of electrical shock or fire
Voltages higher than 30 V RMS or 42 V peak or 60 V DC are regarded as hazardous
contact voltages. When working with hazardous contact voltages, use appropriate protective measures to preclude direct contact with the measurement setup:
●
Use only insulated voltage probes, test leads and adapters.
●
Do not touch voltages higher than 30 V RMS or 42 V peak or 60 V DC.
1.3.3 Right View
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
21
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
LAN
USB type B for remote control
Probe compensation
USB type A for flash drive
Logic probe connector
Risk of injury or instrument damage
Always close the lids of the communication ports and DC input when they are not in
use.
LAN connector
RJ-45 connector to connect the instrument to a Local Area Network (LAN). It supports
up to 100 Mbit/s.
USB type A connector
USB type A connector to connect a USB flash drive to store and reload instrument settings and measurement data.
USB type B connector (mini USB)
Mini USB connector to connect a computer for remote control of the instrument.
Probe compensation
Probe compensation terminal to support adjustment of passive probes to the oscilloscope channel.
Logic probe connector
Input for the logic probe R&S RT-ZL04. Logic analysis requires Mixed Signal Option
R&S RTH-B1, which includes the logic probe R&S RT-ZL04.
Risk of electrical shock - no CAT rating for MSO measurements
The logic probe R&S RT-ZL04 is not rated for any measurement category. To avoid
electrical shock or personal injury, and to prevent material damage, make sure that the
ground clips of the R&S RT-ZL04 are connected to protective earth on the DUT.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
22
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Instrument Tour
1.3.4 Left View
1 = DC Input
2 = Kensington lock slot
DC Input
Connector for the power adapter to charge the battery.
Kensington lock slot
The Kensington lock is used to secure the instrument against theft.
1.3.5 Display Overview
In the most important modes scope, mask and XY, the display shows the following
information.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
23
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Measurement results, depends on the mode and the selected measurement
Time scale (horizontal scale, in s/division)
Trigger type, trigger source, and trigger mode
Capture status
Battery status and AC connectivity for battery charging; date and time
Trigger level
Trigger position
Channel marker indicate the ground levels. Channel C3 has the focus
Vertical settings for each active channel: vertical scale (vertical sensitivity,in V/division), bandwidth limit
(no indicator = full bandwidth, BW= limited frequency), coupling (AC or DC)
10 = Logic channels (MSO R&S RTH-B1)
11 = Menu button
You can adjust the vertical position of each waveform, the trigger level, and the trigger
position by dragging the corresponding marker on the display. Alternatively, tap a
marker to set the focus, and use the wheel to adjust position.
1.4 Operating Basics
1.4.1 Accessing the Functionality
The complete functionality is available in the menus and dialogs on the touchscreen.
You can touch the functions directly on the display, or you can use the wheel to navigate and select. In addition, the most important functions are applied to the keys on the
front panel to quickly set up and perform measurement tasks.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
24
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
1.4.1.1
Using the Touchscreen
Using the touchscreen of the R&S RTH is as easy as using your mobile phone. To
open the menu, tap the "Menu" button - that is the R&S logo in the right bottom corner
of the display.
Figure 1-7: Open the menu and select a menu item
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
25
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
Figure 1-8: Switch on or off (left) and select a parameter value (right)
Figure 1-9: Enter numerical value and unit
1.4.1.2
Using the Navigation Wheel
In addition or alternatively to the touchscreen, you can use the wheel to control the
R&S RTH.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
26
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
When using the wheel, always observe the position of the focus - the orange frame or
other highlighting that marks the active object on the screen.
●
●
If the focus is on the menu button or somewhere in the menu or dialogs:
–
Turn the wheel to move the focus.
–
Press the wheel button to apply the selection.
If the focus is on an element in the diagram, for example, on a waveform, cursor
line, or trigger level:
–
Turn the wheel to change the position of the active element.
–
Press the wheel button to toggle the active element, for example, to toggle the
cursor lines, or zoom size and zoom position.
The BACK key closes open dialogs and menus, and resets the focus to the "Menu"
button.
Menu navigation
The following procedure describes how to access and navigate the menu. Navigating
dialogs and selecting parameter values works in the same way. See also Figure 1-10.
1. Press BACK until the focus is on the "Menu" button.
2. Press the wheel button to open the menu.
3. Turn the wheel to move the focus to the required menu item.
4. Press the wheel button to open the dialog, submenu, or keypad for the selected
menu item.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
27
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
Figure 1-10: Open the menu and select a menu item
Set numerical value using the wheel
1. Set the focus to the required setting and press the wheel button once.
2. Turn the wheel until the required value is shown.
3. Press BACK.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
28
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
Figure 1-11: Set numerical value using the wheel
Data entry using wheel and keypad
You can enter enter precise numerical values on the keypad. See also Figure 1-12.
1. Set the focus to the required setting and press the wheel button twice.
2. Turn the wheel until the focus is on the required number.
3. Press the wheel button.
4. Turn the wheel until the focus is on the required unit.
5. Press the wheel button.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
29
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
Figure 1-12: Enter numerical value and unit in the keypad
The SHIFT button toggles the wheel focus in the keypad. If the focus is on the entry
field, turning the wheel changes the value. If the focus is in the lower part, the wheel
selects numbers and unit.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
30
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
1.4.1.3
Using Front Panel Keys
For an overview of the front panel keys, see Figure 1-4
Key
Short press
Long press
AUTOSET analyses the active channels,
adjusts the instrument settings, and displays
stable waveforms.
PRESET sets the instrument to the default factory state.
MEAS starts or stops the last configured automatic measurements.
Opens or closes the "Meas"
dialog to configure the measurements.
ZOOM enables or disables the zoom with the
last configuration.
Opens or closes the "Zoom"
dialog to configure the zoom
scale and position.
If the zoom is on but not in focus, pressing the
key focuses the zoom.
CURSOR starts or stops the last configured
cursor measurement.
If the cursor is on but not in focus, pressing the
key sets the focus to the first cursor line.
Opens or closes the "Cursor"
dialog to configure the measurement.
MATH switches the math waveform on or off.
Opens or closes the "Math"
dialog to configure the math
waveform.
Requires logic analyzer option R&S RTH-B1
(MSO).
Opens or closes the "Logic"
dialog to configure digital channels.
The effect depends on the state of digital channels:
If the all digital channels are off, the key
switches D0..D7 on and sets the focus.
If the digital channels are on but not in focus,
the key sets the focus.
If the focus is on digital channels, the key
switches them off.
Requires at least one protocol option
R&S RTH-K1 or R&S RTH-K2.
SHIFT opens a dialog to save and load instrument settings.
If a dialog or menu is open, BACK closes it. If the menu is closed, the key toggles the focus between focused element in the diagram and the Menu button.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
31
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
Key
Short press
Long press
Open or close the "Mode", "File" or "Setup" dialog, respectively.
All R&S RTH:
Outputs measurement documentation: saves a
screenshot, waveform data, results, logger
record, instrument settings, and/or text comment. You can select the data for output.
Opens or closes the "Screenshot" dialog to configure the
documentation output.
The effect depends on the channel state:
Open or close the "Vertical"
dialog for the correspondent
channel to configure the channel settings.
If the channel is off, the key switches the channel on and sets the focus. The key lights up.
Only R&S RTH1004:
Only R&S RTH1002:
If the channel is on but not in focus, the key
sets the focus. The key lights up.
DMM starts or stops the meter measurements
(same as MODE = "Meter").
DMM REL enables or disables relative meter
measurements.
Opens or closes the "Meter"
dialog to configure the measurements.
TIME and POS adjust the horizontal time scale and position of the trigger point.
RANGE and POS set the vertical scale (vertical sensitivity) and the vertical position of the focused waveform (analog or channel, math or reference waveform).
SIGNAL OFF switches the focused waveform
off.
RUN STOP starts and stops the acquisition.
SETUP opens or closes the "Trigger" dialog to select the trigger type and adjust
the trigger settings.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
32
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
Key
Short press
Long press
LEVEL activates the trigger level to be set using the wheel. If the trigger type has
two trigger levels, pressing the key toggles the upper and lower levels.
ACQUIRE opens or closes the "Acquire" dialog to adjust the acquisition mode.
POWER key: switches the power on or off
1.4.2 Selecting the Mode
A mode comprises all settings and functions that are needed to perform a measurement task. Selecting the mode is the first setup step.
1. Press the MODE key.
2. Select the mode:
●
●
On the touchscreen: Tap the required mode icon.
Using controls: Turn the wheel until the required mode is marked, and press
the wheel button to select the mode.
Remote command:
OP[:MODE] on page 159
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
33
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
1.4.3 Displaying an Unknown Signal
The R&S RTH can display unknown, complex signals automatically. The AUTOSET
function analyzes the enabled channel signals, and adjusts the horizontal, vertical, and
trigger settings to display stable waveforms.
1. Press the PRESET key.
PRESET sets the instrument to a default factory state. The previous user-defined
configuration is removed and all channels except for channel 1 are disabled.
2. Press the AUTOSET key.
The waveform is displayed.
1.4.4 Getting Information and Help
In most dialogs, graphics explain the meaning of the selected setting. For further information, you can open the help, which provides functional description of the settings
with links to the corresponding remote commands, and background information.
1.4.4.1
Displaying Help
●
"To open the help window" on page 34
●
"To show information on a setting" on page 35
●
"To close the help window" on page 35
To open the help window
► Tap the "Help" icon on the top of the menu.
If a dialog is open, the dialog's help topic is shown beside the dialog.
If a menu is open, the table of contents is shown.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
34
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
To show information on a setting
If a dialog and the help window are open, you can easily call the information on each
setting of the dialog.
► Tap the setting's name.
The corresponding help topic is displayed.
If you tap the switch or the entry field, you can adjust the setting without closing the
help window.
To close the help window
► Tap the "Close" icon in the upper right corner of the help window, or press BACK.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
35
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Operating Basics
1.4.4.2
Using the Help Window
The help window has several tabs:
●
"View": shows the selected help topic.
●
"Contents": contains a table of help contents.
●
"Index": contains index entries to search for help topics.
●
"Search": provides text search.
The help toolbar provides the following buttons:
●
Up and down arrows: browse the topics in the order of the table of contents. Up =
previous topic, down = next topic.
●
Left and right arrows: browse the topics visited before: Left = back, right = forward.
●
Magnifiers: increase or decrease the font.
●
×: closes the help window.
To search for a topic in the index
The index is sorted alphabetically. You can browse the list, or search for entries.
1. Tap the "Index" tab.
2. Tap the entry field on top of the list.
3. Enter some characters of the keyword you are interested in.
You can use the Backspace key to delete single characters, and "Clear" to delete
all characters in the "Keyword" field.
4. Tap the Enter key.
Now only index entries are displayed that contain the keyword characters.
5. To delete the keyword:
a) Tap the entry field again.
b) Tap "Clear".
c) Tap the Enter key.
To search the help for a text string
1. Tap the "Search" tab.
2. Tap the entry field on the top.
3. Enter the words you want to find.
If you enter several words with blanks between, topics containing all words are
found.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
36
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Maintenance
To find a string of several words, enclose it in quotation marks. For example, a
search for "trigger mode" finds all topics with exactly "trigger mode". A search for
trigger mode finds all topics that contain the words trigger and mode.
4. Tap the Enter key.
A list of search results is displayed.
5. To refine the search, use "Match Whole Word" and "Match Case", and tap "Start
Search".
1.5 Maintenance
The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance. Only cleaning the instrument is
essential.
The addresses of the Rohde & Schwarz support centers can be found at
www.customersupport.rohde-schwarz.com.
A list of service centers is available on www.services.rohde-schwarz.com.
1.5.1 Cleaning
Shock hazard
Before cleaning the instrument, remove all probes, leads, USB and LAN cables and
power supply.
Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents
Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument. For example,
cleaning agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling, plastic
parts, or the display.
Never use cleaning agents such as solvents (thinners, acetone, etc), acids, bases, or
other substances.
The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft, lint-free dust
cloth.
1.5.2 Data Storage and Security
The instrument is delivered with the 4 Gbyte microSD card inserted and ready to use.
We recommend that you do not remove the microSD card.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
37
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Getting Started
Maintenance
All instrument configuration data and user data are stored on the microSD card. In
addition, a fallback firmware is stored on the microSD card to boot the instrument if an
update failed.
If you use the instrument in a secured environment, you can remove the microSD card
before the instrument leaves this area. The microSD card slot is under the right lid
under the battery pack.
You can also change the microSD card if you need more memory. The instrument supports microSD cards up to 32 Gbyte.
1.5.3 Storing and Packing
The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet. If the
instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time, it must be protected against dust.
Repack the instrument as it was originally packed when transporting or shipping. The
two protective foam plastic parts prevent the control elements and connectors from
being damaged. The antistatic packing foil avoids any undesired electrostatic charging
to occur.
If you do not use the original packaging, use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size
and provide for sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from slipping inside the
package. Wrap antistatic packing foil around the instrument to protect it from electrostatic charging.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
38
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Connecting Probes
2 Waveform Setup
2.1 Connecting Probes
Shock hazard caused by high voltages
Make sure to set the attenuation factor on the instrument according to the probe being
used. Otherwise, the measurement results do not reflect the actual voltage level, and
you might misjudge the actual risk.
1. Connect the probe(s) first to the channel input(s) at the top of the instrument, and
then to the DUT.
2. Press and hold the CH key of the used input.
3. Select "Probe Setting".
4. Select the attenuation factor of the probe.
The probe's attenuation factor is indicated on the probe.
Note: If you perform current measurements using a shunt resistor as a current sensor, you have to multiply the V/A-value of the resistor by the attenuation of the
probe. For example, if a 1 Ω resistor and a 10:1 probe is used, the V/A-value of the
resistor is 1 V/A, the attenuation factor of the probe is 0.1, and the resulting current
probe attenuation is 100 mV/A.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
39
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Vertical Setup
2.2 Vertical Setup
The controls and parameters of the vertical system are used to scale and position the
waveform vertically.
1. To set vertical scale and position, use the RANGE and POS keys.
2. To adjust other vertical settings, select "Vertical" in the main menu.
As long as the "Vertical" menu is open, the probe settings of active channels are
shown on top of the display.
Vertical scale and vertical position directly affect the resolution of the waveform amplitude. To get the full resolution, waveforms should cover most of the sceen's height.
Description of settings
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
40
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Vertical Setup
Channel Index
Selects the channel to be set up. All settings in the channel menu belong to the
selected channel.
You can also press the channel key to select a channel. A long press of the channel
key opens the correspondent channel menu.
State
Switches the selected channel on or off.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:STATe on page 160
Coupling
Selects the connection of the input signal. The current coupling of each channel is
shown in the channel label at the display bottom.
"AC"
A high-pass filter removes the DC offset voltage from the input signal
if the DC component of a signal is of no interest. The waveform is
centered around zero volts.
"DC"
The signal passes the input unchanged.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:COUPling on page 163
Bandwidth
Selects the bandwidth limit. The full instrument bandwidth indicates the range of frequencies that the instrument can acquire and display accurately with less than 3 dB
attenuation.
For analog applications, the highest signal frequency determines the required oscilloscope bandwidth. As a rule of thumb, the oscilloscope bandwidth should be 3 times
higher than the maximum frequency included in the analog test signal to measure the
amplitude with high accuracy.
Most test signals are more complex than a simple sine wave and include several spectral components. A digital signal, for example, is built up of several odd harmonics. As
a rule of thumb, for digital signals the oscilloscope bandwidth should be 5 times higher
than the clock frequency to be measured.
The oscilloscope is not a stand-alone system. You need a probe to measure the signal,
and the probe has a limited bandwidth, too. The combination of oscilloscope and probe
creates a system bandwidth. To reduce the effect of the probe on the system bandwidth, the probe bandwidth should exceed the bandwidth of the oscilloscope, the recommended factor is 1.5 x oscilloscope bandwidth.
"Full"
At full bandwidth, all frequencies in the specified range are acquired
and displayed. Full bandwidth is used for most applications.
"x MHz, x kHz"
Frequency limit. Frequencies above the selected limit are removed to
reduce noise at different levels. Limited bandwidth is indicated in the
channel label.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
41
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Vertical Setup
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth on page 163
Invert
Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off. To invert means to reflect the voltage values of all signal components against the ground level. Inversion affects only the
display of the signal but not the trigger. For example: if the oscilloscope triggers on the
rising edge, the trigger is not changed by inversion, but the actually rising edge is displayed as falling edge.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:POLarity on page 162
Probe Setting
Selects the attenuation factor of the connected probe. The vertical scaling and measured values are multiplied by this factor so that the displayed values are equal to the
actual signal values.
Make sure to set the attenuation factor on the instrument according to the probe being
used. Otherwise, the measurement results do not reflect the actual voltage level, and
you might misjudge the actual risk.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:PROBe on page 161
Offset
Sets an offset voltage that is added to correct an offset-affected signal. The value is
included in measurement results. The signal is shifted in relation to the ground level by
the offset value. Negative offset values move the waveform down, positive values
move it up.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet on page 163
Deskew
Sets a delay for the selected channel.
Deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the different
length of cables, probes, and other sources. Correct deskew values are important for
accurate triggering. The propagation delay may lead to a non-synchronous waveform
display. For example, a coax cable with a length of one meter has a propagation delay
of typically 5.3 ns.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:DESKew on page 164
Threshold
The threshold is used for digitization of analog signals. If the signal value is higher than
the threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the boolean logic). Otherwise, if the
signal value is below the threshold, the signal state is considered low (0 or false).
"Threshold"
Select a
"User Threshold Value"
Sets an individual threshold value if ... is set to "User".
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
42
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Horizontal Setup
"Find Threshold"
Analyzes the signal and sets the threshold to 50% of the amplitude.
"Show Threshold"
Shows the threshold level on the display.
RANGE keys
The vertical RANGE keys set the vertical scale (vertical sensitivity) of the selected
waveform.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:SCALe on page 161
CHANnel<m>:RANGe on page 161
POS keys
Move the selected signal up or down in the diagram. The position is a graphical setting
given in divisions, while the offset sets a voltage.
You can also drag the channel marker on the screen.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:POSition on page 162
2.3 Horizontal Setup
Horizontal settings, also known as time base settings, adjust the display in horizontal
direction.
1. To set the time base and horizontal position, use the TIME and POS keys.
2. To adjust all horizontal settings, select "Horizontal" in the main menu.
The determining point of an acquisition is the trigger point. Two parameters define the
position of the trigger point: reference point and horizontal position (also known as trigger offset or delay). Using these parameters, you choose the part of the waveform you
want to see: around the trigger, before, or after the trigger.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
43
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Horizontal Setup
t=0
T
Horiz. position from right ref. point (> 0)
Horiz. position from
middle ref. point (> 0)
Horiz. position from
left ref. point (< 0)
Reference point
= Left
Reference point
= Middle
Reference point
= Right
Description of settings
Time Scale
Sets the time scale of the horizontal axis for all signals, in seconds per division. The
value is shown in the top information bar.
Increase the scale to see a longer part of the waveform. Decrease the scale to see the
signal in more detail. The scale has a point that remains fixed on the screen when the
scale value is changing - the reference point.
To set the time scale, you can also use the TIME keys.
Remote command:
TIMebase:SCALe on page 164
TIMebase:RANGe on page 165
Horizontal Position
Sets the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point. The
trigger position is marked by a colored triangle at the top of the diagram.
You can set the trigger point even outside the diagram and analyze the signal some
time before or after the trigger. In this case, the trigger marker is shown on the left or
right side of the diagram.
To set the horizontal position, you can also use the POS keys.
Remote command:
TIMebase:HORizontal:POSition on page 165
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
44
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Acquisition Control
Reference Point
Defines the time reference point in the diagram. You can set the reference point in the
middle, or to the right to see the signal before the trigger, or the the left to see the signal after the trigger.
Remote command:
TIMebase:REFerence on page 165
2.4 Acquisition Control
Acquisition settings define the processing of the captured samples in the instrument.
► To adjust the acquisition settings, press the ACQUIRE key, or select "Acquire" in
the main menu.
► To start or stop acquisition, press the RUN STOP key.
The R&S RTH captures the continuous signal and converts it to digital samples. The
digital samples are processed according to the acquisition settings. The result is a
waveform record that is displayed on the screen and stored in memory.
Description of settings
Acquisition Mode
Defines how the waveform is built from the captured samples.
"Sample"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
One of n samples in a sample interval is recorded as waveform point,
the other samples are discarded. Usually, most signals are displayed
optimally with this acquisition mode but very short glitches might
remain undiscovered by this method.
45
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Acquisition Control
"Peak Detect"
The minimum and the maximum of n samples are recorded as waveform points, the other samples are discarded. Thus the instrument
can detect fast signal peaks at slow time scale settings that would be
missed with other acquisition modes.
"High Resolution"
The average of n captured sample points is recorded as one waveform point. Averaging reduces the noise, the result is a more precise
waveform with higher vertical resolution.
"Average"
The average is calculated from the data of the current acquisition and
a number of acquisitions before. The method reduces random noise.
It requires a stable, triggered and repetitive signal. The number of
acquisitions for average calculation is defined with Number of Averages.
"Envelope"
The minimum and maximum values in an sample interval over a number of acquisitions are saved. The most extreme values of all acquisitions build the envelope. The resulting diagram shows two envelope
waveforms: the minimums (floor) and maximums (roof) representing
the borders in which the signal occurs.
Remote command:
ACQuire:MODE on page 166
Number of Averages
Sets the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform.
Remote command:
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt on page 167
Reset Waveform
Restarts the envelope and average calculation.
Remote command:
ACQuire:ARESet:IMMediate on page 167
Sampling Rate C1 - C4
Shows the number of recorded analog waveform points per second. The sample rate is
the reciprocal value of the resolution.
Remote command:
ACQuire:POINts:ARATe? on page 165
Sampling Rate D7 - D0
Shows the number of recorded digital waveform points per second.
RUN STOP key
Starts and stops the acquisition.
Remote command:
RUN on page 166
STOP on page 166
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
46
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
2.5 Trigger
Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the relevant waveforms. Choosing
the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect
various incidents in signals.
A trigger occurs if the trigger conditions are fulfilled. The instrument acquires continuously and keeps the sample points to fill the pretrigger part of the waveform record.
When the trigger occurs, the instrument continues acquisition until the posttrigger part
of the waveform record is filled. Then it stops acquiring and displays the waveform.
When a trigger is recognized, the the instrument does not accept another trigger until
the acquisition is complete.
Trigger conditions include:
●
Source of the trigger signal (channel)
●
Trigger type and its setup, including the trigger level(s)
●
Trigger mode
In addition, the horizontal position of the trigger point and the reference point are
important to display the interesting part of the signal, see Chapter 2.3, "Horizontal
Setup", on page 43.
Information on the most important trigger settings is shown in the upper information
bar.
Figure 2-1: Trigger information: width trigger on channel 2, single trigger mode
► To adjust all trigger settings, press the SETUP key.
► To adjust the trigger level, do one of the following:
●
●
●
Drag the trigger level marker on the right side of the display to the required
position.
Press the LEVEL key and turn the wheel.
If the trigger type has two trigger levels, press the LEVEL key again to toggle
the upper and lower levels, or press the wheel.
Press the SETUP key, select "Trigger Level", and enter the level value.
► To start and stop acquisition, press the RUN STOP key.
2.5.1 General Trigger Settings
General trigger settings are the settings that are independent of the trigger type. The
settings specific for a trigger type are described in the following sections.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
47
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Description of settings
Trigger Mode
The trigger mode determines the behavior of the instrument if no trigger occurs, and
also the number of acquired waveforms when a trigger occurs.
"Auto"
The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger
conditions are not fulfilled. If a real trigger occurs, it takes precedence. This mode helps to see the waveform even before the trigger
is set. Successive waveforms are not triggered at the same point of
the waveform.
"Normal"
The instrument acquires waveforms continuously, each time when a
trigger occurs. If no trigger occurs, no waveform is acquired and the
last acquired waveform is displayed. If no waveform was captured
before, nothing is displayed.
"Single"
When a trigger occurs, the instrument acquires one waveform and
stops the acquisition.
Remote command:
TRIGger:MODE on page 168
Trigger Type
Selects the trigger type, the event type that defines the trigger point.
●
●
●
●
Chapter 2.5.2, "Edge Trigger", on page 50
Chapter 2.5.3, "Glitch Trigger", on page 51
Chapter 2.5.4, "Width Trigger", on page 52
Chapter 2.5.5, "Video/TV Trigger", on page 53
Remote command:
TRIGger:TYPE on page 169
Source
Selects the trigger source, the channel on which the trigger condition is checked.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
48
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
For most trigger types, analog and digital channels can be used as trigger source. Digital channels require option R&S RTH-B1. For video, runt and slew rate trigger, only
analog channels are available.
Remote command:
TRIGger:SOURce on page 169
Trigger Level
Sets the trigger voltage level.
For the Video/TV trigger, the trigger level is the threshold of the sync pulse. Make sure
that the trigger level crosses the synchronizing pulses of the video signal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:VALue on page 169
Holdoff Mode
Selects the method to define the holdoff.
The trigger holdoff defines when the next trigger after the current will be recognized.
Thus, it affects the next trigger to occur after the current one. Holdoff helps to obtain
stable triggering when the oscilloscope is triggering on undesired events.
"Off"
No holdoff
"Time"
Defines the holdoff as a time period. The next trigger occurs only
after the "Time" on page 49 has passed.
"Events"
Defines the holdoff as a number of trigger events. The next trigger
only occurs when this number of events is reached. The number of
triggers to be skipped is defined in "Events" on page 49.
"Random"
Defines the holdoff as a random time limited by "Min Time / Max
Time" on page 50. For each acquisition, the instrument selects a
new random holdoff time from the specified range.
Random holdoff prevents synchronization to discover effects invisible
with synchronized triggering, e.g. the features of a pulse train.
Remote command:
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MODE on page 169
Time ← Holdoff Mode
Sets the time that has to pass at least until the next trigger occurs.
Remote command:
TRIGger:HOLDoff:TIME on page 170
Events ← Holdoff Mode
Sets the number of triggers to be skipped until the next trigger occurs.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
49
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Remote command:
TRIGger:HOLDoff:EVENts on page 170
Min Time / Max Time ← Holdoff Mode
Set the time limits for random holdoff time. For each acquisition, the instrument selects
a new random holdoff time from the specified range.
Remote command:
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MIN on page 170
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MAX on page 170
Noise Reject
Enables a hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation
around the trigger level.
Remote command:
TRIGger:MNR on page 171
2.5.2 Edge Trigger
The edge trigger is the most common trigger type. The trigger occurs when the signal
from the trigger source passes the trigger level in the specified direction (slope).
Description of settings
Figure 2-2: Edge trigger
Slope
Sets the edge direction for the trigger. You can trigger on:
●
Rising edge, that is a positive voltage change
●
Falling edge, that is a negative voltage change
●
Rising and falling edge
Remote command:
TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe on page 171
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
50
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
2.5.3 Glitch Trigger
The glitch trigger detects pulses shorter or longer than a specified time. It identifies
deviation from the nominal data rate and helps to analyze causes of even rare glitches
and their effects on other signals.
Description of settings
Polarity
Sets the pulse polarity, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. You can trigger on:
●
●
●
Positive going pulses. The width is defined from the rising to the falling edge.
Negative going pulses. The width is defined from the falling to the rising edge.
Both positive and negative going pulses
Remote command:
TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity on page 171
Range
Selects the glitches to be identified: shorter or longer than the specified "Width"
on page 51.
Remote command:
TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe on page 172
Width
Sets the pulse width of the glitch.
Remote command:
TRIGger:GLITch:WIDTh on page 172
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
51
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
2.5.4 Width Trigger
The width trigger compares the measured pulse width (duration of a pulse) with a given
time limit. It detects pulses with an exact pulse width, pulses shorter or longer than a
given time, as well as pulses inside or outside the allowable time range. The pulse
width is measured at the trigger level.
Using the width trigger, you can define the pulse width more precisely than with the
glitch trigger. However, using the range settings "Shorter" and "Longer", you can also
trigger on glitches.
Description of settings
Figure 2-3: Width trigger
Polarity
Sets the pulse polarity, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. You can trigger on:
●
●
●
Positive going pulses. The width is defined from the rising to the falling edge.
Negative going pulses. The width is defined from the falling to the rising edge.
Both positive and negative going pulses
Remote command:
TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity on page 172
Range
Defines how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit(s).
Figure 2-4: Pulse width is shorter or longer than a given width (same as glitch trigger)
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
52
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
min
max
1
min
max
2
Figure 2-5: Pulse width is inside or outside a range
1 = Inside, pulse > min width AND pulse < max width
2 = Outside, pulse < min width OR pulse > max width
±Δ
1
±Δ
2
Figure 2-6: Pulse width is equal or unequal to a given width, with optional tolerance
1 = Equal, pulse > width - Δ AND pulse < width + Δ
2 = Unequal, pulse < width - Δ OR pulse > width + Δ
Remote command:
TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe on page 172
Width
Sets the width for comparisons equal, unequal, shorter, and longer.
Remote command:
TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh on page 173
±Tolerance
Sets a range Δt to the specified Width if the comparison range is equal or unequal. To
trigger on an exact pulse width, set the tolerance to 0.
Remote command:
TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa on page 173
Min Width / Max Width
Set the lower and upper time limits defining the time range if "Inside" or "Outside" is set
for comparison.
Remote command:
TRIGger:WIDTh:MIN on page 174
TRIGger:WIDTh:MAX on page 173
2.5.5 Video/TV Trigger
The TV or video trigger is used to analyze analog baseband video signals. You can
trigger on baseband video signals from standard definition and high definition standards, and also on user defined signals.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
53
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
The instrument triggers on the line start - the horizontal sync pulse. You can trigger on
all lines, or specify a line number. You can also trigger on the field or frame start.
2.5.5.1
Standard TV Trigger Settings
Access: SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Video/TV"
Standard
Selects the TV standard or "Custom" for user-defined signals.
The standards PAL, PAL-M, NTSC and SECAM are available in the instrument firmware. All other standards require the advance trigger option R&S RTH-K19.
HDTV standards are indicated by the number of active lines, the scanning system (p
for progressive scanning, i for interlaced scanning) and the frame rate (or field rate for
interlaced scanning). 1080p/24sF is a HDTV standard using progressive segmented
frame scanning.
"Custom" can be used for signals of other video systems, for example, medical displays, video monitors, and security cameras. To trigger on these signals, you have to
define the pulse type and length of the sync pulse, the scanning system and the line
period.
Signal Polarity
Sets the polarity of the signal. Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity, for
example, a positive signal has a negative sync pulse.
Figure 2-7: Signal with positive polarity and tri-level sync pulse
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
54
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Mode
Selects the lines or fields on which the instrument triggers. Available modes depend on
the scanning system, which is used bei the selected standard.
"All fields"
Triggers on the first video line of the frame (progressive scanning) or
field (interlaced scanning), for example, to find amplitude differences
between the fields.
"Odd fields /
Even fields"
Triggers on the first video line of the odd or even field. These modes
are available for interlaced scanning (PAL, PAL-M, SECAM, NTSC,
1080i) and progressive segmented frame scanning (1080p/24sF).
They can be used, for example, to analyze the components of a video
signal.
"All lines"
Triggers on the line start of all video lines, for example, to find maximum video levels.
"Line number"
Triggers on a specified line. Enter the line number in "Line #".
Line #
Sets the number of the line to be triggered on if "Mode" is set to "Line number". Usually
the lines of the frame are counted, beginning from the frame start.
For NTSC signals, the lines are counted per field, not per frame. Therefore, you have
to set the "Field" (odd or even), and the line number in the field.
Trigger Level
Sets the trigger level as threshold for the synchronizing pulse. Make sure that the trigger level crosses the synchronizing pulses of the video signal.
Figure 2-8: Trigger level with bi-level (left) and tri-level (right) sync pulses
Remote command:
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:VALue on page 169
2.5.5.2
Settings for Custom Video Signals (R&S RTH-K19)
In addition to the standard TV trigger settings, triggering on custom video signals
requires a few more settings that describe the signal.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Video/TV" > "Standard" = "Custom"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
55
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Pulse Type
Sets the type of the sync pulse, either bi-level sync pulse (usually used in SDTV signals), or tri-level sync pulse (used in HDTV signals).
Figure 2-9: Bi-level (left) and tri-level (right) sync pulses
This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom".
Line Period
Sets the duration of a line, the time between two successive sync pulses.
Line period
This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom".
Pulse Width
Sets the width of the sync pulse.
Pulse width
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
56
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom".
Scan
Sets the scanning system.
This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom".
"Interlaced"
Interlace scanning uses two fields to create a frame. One field contains all the odd lines (odd, first, or upper filed), the other contains all
the even lines of the image (even, second, or lower field). First the
lines of the odd filed are processed, then the lines of the even field.
"Progressive"
Progressive scanning is a method to capture, transmit and display all
lines of a frame in sequence.
"Segmented"
Progressive segmented frame uses progressive scanning to capture
the frame, and interlaced scanning for transmission and display.
2.5.6 Pattern Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
The pattern trigger works like a logic trigger. It provides logical combinations of the
input channels and can be used for verifying the operation of digital logic. If the channel states match the desired pattern, the pattern trigger occurs. In addition to the pattern, you can define a timing condition. In this case, the trigger occurs if the pattern
definition is true for the defined time.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Pattern"
Description of settings
Figure 2-10: Pattern Trigger
Set Pattern
Defines the pattern: the states of the input channels and their logical combination. If
R&S RTH-B1 is installed, active digital channels are also included in the pattern definition.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
57
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Figure 2-11: Pattern definition
The current threshold is displayed for each channel. Tap "Find Level" to determine a
useful threshold for all active channels.
The switches define the required state of each channel and set the logical combination:
"1"
The signal value is above the defined threshold.
"0"
The signal value is below the defined threshold.
"X"
The signal state does not matter.
"AND"
If all defined states are true, the logical result of the pattern definition
is 1 (true).
"OR"
If at least one of the defined states is true, the logical result of the pattern definition is 1 (true).
Remote command:
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe[:CHANnel<1..22>] on page 174
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe:COMBination on page 174
Range
Adds additional time limitation to the defined pattern.
"None"
No time limit is set. If the defined pattern is true, the pattern trigger
occurs.
"Timeout"
Defines a minimum time during which the signals match the pattern
definition.
"Longer"
If the pattern is true longer than the "Pattern Width" time, the trigger
occurs.
"Shorter"
If the pattern is true for a time shorter than "Pattern Width", the trigger
occurs.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
58
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
"Equal"
If the pattern is true for the time "Pattern Width" ± Δt (Tolerance), the
trigger occurs.
"Unequal"
If the pattern is true for a time shorter than "Pattern Width" - Δt OR
longer than "Pattern Width" + Δt, the trigger occurs.
"Inside"
If the pattern is true for a time between "Min Pattern Width" and "Max
Pattern Width", the trigger occurs.
"Outside"
If the pattern is true for a time shorter than "Min Pattern Width" OR
longer than "Max Pattern Width", the trigger occurs.
Remote command:
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe on page 175
TRIGger:PATTern:TIMeout[:TIME] on page 175
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] on page 175
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa on page 176
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] on page 175
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa on page 176
2.5.7 State Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
The state trigger verifies if the channel states match the defined pattern at the clock
edge. The trigger occurs if the logical combination of the input channels is true at the
crossing point of the selected clock edge and the trigger level.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "State"
Description of settings
Figure 2-12: State Trigger
Clock Source
Selects the input channel of the clock signal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce[:VALue] on page 177
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
59
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Clock Slope
Sets the edge of the clock at which the instrument checks the signal states: at the rising edge, the falling adge, or at both edges.
Remote command:
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce:EDGE on page 177
Set Pattern
Defines the pattern: the states of the input channels and their logical combination. If
R&S RTH-B1 is installed, active digital channels are also included in the pattern definition.
For details, see Chapter 2.5.6, "Pattern Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)", on page 57.
Remote command:
TRIGger:STATe:CHANnel<1..22> on page 176
TRIGger:STATe:COMBination on page 177
2.5.8 Runt Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
A runt is a pulse lower than normal in amplitude. The amplitude crosses the first level
twice in succession without crossing the second one. In addition to the upper and lower
levels, you can define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width triggers. For
example, the runt trigger can detect signal parts remaining below a specified threshold
amplitude because I/O ports are in undefined state.
UL
LL
Figure 2-13: Runt trigger without time limits
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Runt"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
60
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Description of settings
Upper Trigger Level / Lower Trigger Level
Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds for the runt trigger. The levels define the
minimum and maximum runt amplitudes.
You can also press the LEVEL key to toggle the upper and lower levels, and turn the
wheel to adjust the focused level. If the focus is on a trigger level, pressing the wheel
also toggles the levels.
Remote command:
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:UPPer on page 177
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:LOWer on page 177
Polarity
Sets the pulse polarity, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. You can trigger on:
●
●
●
Positive going pulses. The width is defined from the rising to the falling edge.
Negative going pulses. The width is defined from the falling to the rising edge.
Both positive and negative going pulses
Remote command:
TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity on page 178
Range
Defines an additional time limit of the runt pulse.
"Any runt" triggers on all runts fulfilling the level condition, without time limitation. The
other comparisons are the same as for the width trigger, see "Range" on page 52.
Remote command:
TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe on page 178
Runt Width
Sets the width for comparisons equal, unequal, shorter, and longer.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
61
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Remote command:
TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh on page 178
±Tolerance
Sets a tolerance range Δt to the specified Runt Width if the comparison range is equal
or unequal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa on page 178
Min Runt Width / Max Runt Width
Set the lower and upper time limits if "Inside" or "Outside" is set for comparison.
2.5.9 Slew Rate Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
The slew rate trigger, also known as transition trigger, triggers on edges if the transition
time from the lower to higher voltage level (or vice versa) is shorter or longer as
defined, or outside or inside a specified time range.
The slew rate trigger finds slew rates faster than expected or permissible to avoid overshooting and other interfering effects. It also detects very slow edges violating the timing in pulse series.
UL
LL
min
max
Figure 2-14: Slew rate trigger, transition time inside a range (t > min time AND t < max time)
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Slew rate"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
62
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Description of settings
Upper Trigger Level / Lower Trigger Level
Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds for the slew rate trigger. The time measurement starts when the signal crosses the first trigger level - the upper or lower level
depending on the selected slope - and stops when the signal crosses the second level.
Remote command:
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:UPPer on page 179
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:LOWer on page 179
Slope
Sets the edge direction for the trigger. You can trigger on:
●
Rising edge, that is a positive voltage change
●
Falling edge, that is a negative voltage change
●
Rising and falling edge
Remote command:
TRIGger:SLEW:SLOPe on page 179
Range
Defines the time limits of the slew rate. The comparisons are the same as for the width
trigger, see "Range" on page 52.
Remote command:
TRIGger:SLEW:RANGe on page 179
Time
Sets the slew rate for comparisons equal, unequal, shorter, and longer.
Remote command:
TRIGger:SLEW:RATE on page 180
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
63
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
±Tolerance
Sets a tolerance range Δt to the specified Time if the comparison range is equal or
unequal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:SLEW:DELTa on page 180
Min Time / Max Time
Set the lower and upper time limits if "Inside" or "Outside" is set for comparison.
2.5.10 Data2Clock Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
With the Data2Clock trigger - also known as setup/hold trigger - you can analyze the
relative timing between two signals: a data signal and the synchronous clock signal.
Many systems require, that the data signal must be steady for some time before and
after the clock edge, for example, the data transmission on parallel interfaces.
The reference point for the time measurement is defined by clock level and clock edge.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Data2Clk"
Description of settings
Figure 2-15: Data2Clock Trigger
Clock Source
Selects the input channel of the clock signal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce[:VALue] on page 181
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
64
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Clock Slope
Sets the edge of the clock signal: rising, falling, or both edges. The time reference
point for the setup and hold time is the crossing point of the clock edge and the trigger
level.
Remote command:
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce:EDGE on page 181
Data Source
Selects the input channel of the data signal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:DATatoclock:DSOurce[:VALue] on page 181
Trigger on Setup & Hold
Selects how a violation of the setup and hold time is handled.
"Violation"
Triggers on a violation of the setup or hold time
"OK"
Triggers if setup and hold time keep the limits.
Remote command:
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CONDition on page 181
Setup Time
Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady.
The setup time can be negative. In this case, the hold time is always positive. If you set
a negative setup time, the hold time is adjusted by the instrument.
Remote command:
TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe on page 182
Hold Time
Sets the minimum time after the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady.
The hold time can be negative. In this case, the setup time is always positive. If you set
a negative hold time, the setup time is adjusted by the instrument.
Remote command:
TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe on page 181
2.5.11 Serial Pattern Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
The serial pattern event is used to trigger on signals with serial data patterns in relation
to a clock signal - for example, on bus signals like the I²C bus. The trigger occurs during the reception of the last bit of the defined pattern.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Serial Pattern"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
65
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Description of settings
Figure 2-16: Serial Pattern Trigger
Clock Source
Selects the input channel of the clock signal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue] on page 182
Clock Slope
Sets the edge at which the data value is sampled.
●
Rising edge
●
Falling edge
●
Rising and falling edges are considered (double data rate).
At double data rate, "First Clock Edge of Pattern" defines the edge at which the first
bit of the pattern is sampled: at the rising clock edge, falling clock edge, or the first
edge that is detected ("Both").
Remote command:
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:EDGE on page 182
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:FIRStedge on page 183
Data Source
Selects the input channel of the data signal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:SPATtern:DSOurce[:VALue] on page 182
Set Serial Pattern
The pattern defines the bits of the serial data to be found in the data stream. The maximum length of the pattern is 32 bit. You can enter the pattern in binary or hexadecimal
format. In binary format, an X indicates that the logical level for the bit is not relevant
(don't care).
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
66
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Remote command:
TRIGger:SPATtern:PATTern on page 183
Bit Order
Defines if the data words start with msb (most significant bit) or lsb (least significant
bit).
Remote command:
TRIGger:SPATtern:ORDer on page 183
2.5.12 Timeout Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
The timeout trigger checks if the signal stays above or below the trigger level for a
specified time lapse. In other words, the trigger occurs if the signal does not cross the
trigger level during the specified time.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Timeout"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
67
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Description of settings
Figure 2-17: Timeout Trigger
Range
Selects the relation of the signal level to the trigger level:
"Stays High"
The signal level stays above the trigger level.
"Stays Low"
The signal level stays below the trigger level.
"High or Low"
The signal level stays above or below the trigger level.
Remote command:
TRIGger:TIMeout:RANGe on page 184
Time
Defines the time limit for the timeout at which the instrument triggers.
Remote command:
TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME on page 184
2.5.13 Interval Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
The interval trigger analyzes the time between two pulses.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Interval"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
68
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Description of settings
Figure 2-18: Interval Trigger
Slope
Sets the edge for the trigger. You can analyze the interval between positive edges or
between negative edges.
Remote command:
TRIGger:INTerval:SLOPe on page 186
Range
Defines how the time range of an interval is defined. The comparisons are the same as
for the width trigger, see "Range" on page 52.
Remote command:
TRIGger:INTerval:RANGe on page 186
Interval Width
Sets the time between two pulses for comparisons equal, unequal, shorter, and longer.
Remote command:
TRIGger:INTerval:WIDTh on page 187
±Tolerance
Sets a tolerance range Δt to the specified Interval Width if the comparison range is
equal or unequal.
Remote command:
TRIGger:INTerval:DELTa on page 187
Min Interval Width / Max Interval Width
Set the lower and upper time limits if "Inside" or "Outside" is set for comparison.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
69
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
2.5.14 Window Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)
The window trigger checks the signal run in relation to a "window" that is formed by the
upper and lower voltage levels. The trigger occurs, if the waveform enters or leaves the
window, or if the waveform stays inside or outside for a defined time range.
With the window trigger, you can display longer transient effects.
► SETUP key > "Trigger Type" = "Window"
Description of settings
Figure 2-19: Window Trigger
Vertical Condition
Selects how the signal run is compared with the window:
"Enter"
Triggers when the signal crosses the upper or lower level and thus
enters the window made up of these two levels.
"Exit"
Triggers when the signal leaves the window.
"Stay Inside"
Triggers if the signal stays between the upper and lower level for a
specified time. The time is defined in various ways by the "Range"
conditions.
"Stay Outside"
Triggers if the signal stays above the upper level or below the lower
level for a specified time. The time is defined in various ways by the
"Range" conditions.
Remote command:
TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe on page 185
Upper Trigger Level / Lower Trigger Level
Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds for the window trigger. The trigger levels
are the vertical window limits.
Remote command:
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:UPPer on page 184
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:LOWer on page 184
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
70
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Setup
Trigger
Range
Selects how the time limit of the window is defined. Time conditioning is available for
the vertical conditions "Stay Inside" and "Stay Outside".
"Longer"
Triggers if the signal crosses the upper or lower level after the specified "Width" time is reached.
"Shorter"
Triggers if the signal crosses the upper or lower level before the
specified "Width" time is reached.
"Equal"
Triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window limits
for the time "Width" "±Tolerance".
"Unequal"
Triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window limits
for a time unequal to "Width" "±Tolerance"
"Inside"
Triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window limits
at least for the time "Min Width" and for "Max Width" at the most.
"Outside"
"Outside" is the opposite definition of "Inside". The trigger occurs if
the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window limits for a time
shorter than "Min Width" or longer than "Max Width".
Remote command:
TRIGger:WINDow:TIME on page 184
TRIGger:WINDow:WIDTh on page 185
TRIGger:WINDow:DELTa on page 186
2.5.15 Protocol Trigger (R&S RTH-K1 and R&S RTH-K2)
The protocol trigger requires at least one of the serial protocol options. For protocol
setup and trigger settings, see
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
71
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Zoom
3 Waveform Analysis
3.1 Zoom
The zoom magnifies a part of the waveform in order to view more details with a maximum zoom factor of 100.
To activate the zoom:
► Press the ZOOM key.
To adjust the zoom using the wheel:
1. Check if the zoom has the focus - an orange frame on the zoom indicator. If not,
press the ZOOM key.
2. Turn the wheel to adjust the position of the zoom area.
3. Press the wheel to toggle the setting.
4. Turn the wheel to adjust the zoom factor.
To adjust the zoom on the touchscreen:
► Drag the zoom area in the zoom indicator, or drag the waveform to the left or right.
To adjust the zoom numerically in the "Zoom" menu:
► Long-press the ZOOM key.
The zoom is applied to all active analog and digital channels and math waveforms. The
waveforms are displayed with a shorter time scale while the vertical scale remains
unchanged. The zoom indicator on the bottom shows the size and position of the zoom
area in the waveform.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
72
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Zoom
Figure 3-1: Zoomed waveform and zoom indicator with focus on zoom factor
Figure 3-2: Zoom indicator with focus on zoom position
To analyze the zoomed signal, you can use cursor measurements.
Description of settings
Enabled
Enables or disables the zoom.
Remote command:
ZOOM:ENABle on page 187
Scale
Sets the time scale of the zoomed waveform.
Time base zoom = Time base wfm / Zoom factor
Remote command:
ZOOM:SCALe on page 187
Position
Sets the center position of the zoomed area in relation to the trigger point.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
73
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Automatic Measurements
Note: The zoom overview also considers the horizontal position of the trigger point. If
the horizontal position is ≠ 0 and thus the trigger point is not in the middle, the zoom
area in the overview is also shifted, even if the zoom position is 0.
Remote command:
ZOOM:POSition on page 188
3.2 Automatic Measurements
You can perform up to four different measurements simultaneously.
► To configure automatic measurements in the "Meas" menu, long-press the MEAS
key.
► To start and stop the last configured measurements, press the MEAS key.
3.2.1 Measurement Results
The measurement results are shown on the left-top side of the screen.
Figure 3-3: Results of 4 active measurements
If a result cannot be determined, "---" is displayed. Adjust the horizontal and vertical
settings if the instrument cannot measure.
If the measurement result is outside the measurement range and clipping occurs, the
results are marked with < (underflow) or > (overflow). Adjust the vertical scale to get
valid results.
Figure 3-4: Invalid measurement results
Meas1 = period measurement on C3, no complete period detected
Meas2 = peak to peak measurement on C1, waveform is clipped
Meas3 = pulse count on C3, no pulse detected
Remote commands:
●
MEASurement<m>:RESult:ACTual? on page 190
●
MEASurement<m>:RESult:LIMit? on page 190
3.2.2 Measurement Types
The R&S RTH provides 35 measurement types to measure time, amplitude and power
characteristics, and to count pulses and edges.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
74
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Automatic Measurements
3.2.2.1
Time Measurements
Meas. type
Symbol
Description
Period
T
Time of the first period, measured on the
50% level. The measurement requires at
least one complete period of the signal.
in s
Frequency
f
in Hz
Graphic / formula
Source
T
Analog, math,
reference, digital
f=1/T
T
Analog, math,
reference, digital
50%
Frequency of the signal, reciprocal value
of the measured first period.
50%
Rise time
tR
in s
Rise time of the first rising edge. This is
the time it takes the signal to rise from
the 10% level to the 90% level.
tR
Analog, math,
reference
tF
Analog, math,
reference
90%
10%
Fall time
tF
in s
Fall time of the first falling edge. This is
the time it takes the signal to fall from the
90% level to the 10% level.
90%
10%
Positive pulse
width
Negative pulse
width
Positive duty cycle
t+
in s
tin s
Dty+
in %
Negative duty cycle Dtyin %
Duration of the first positive pulse: time
between a rising edge and the following
falling edge measured on the 50% level.
Duration of the first negative pulse: time
between a falling edge and the following
rising edge measured on the 50% level.
t+
Analog, math,
reference, digital
t-
Analog, math,
reference, digital
50%
50%
Width of the first positive pulse in relation Dty+ = t+ / T * 100%
to the period in %. The measurement
0%
T
requires at least one complete period of
t+
the signal.
Width of the first negative pulse in relation to the period in %. The measurement requires at least one complete
period of the signal.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
100%
Analog, math,
reference, digital
100%
Analog, math,
reference, digital
Dty- = t- / T * 100%
0%
T
t-
75
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Automatic Measurements
Meas. type
Symbol
Description
Graphic / formula
Delay
Δt
Time difference between two slopes of
the same or different waveforms, measured on the 50% level.
S1
in s
Source
2 sources:
analog, math,
reference, digital
t
S2
∡
Phase
in °
Phase difference between two waveforms, measured on the 50% level.
Phase = Δt / T * 360°
2 sources:
S1
analog, math,
reference, digital
0%
100%
t
S2
3.2.2.2
Amplitude Measurements
The unit of most amplitude measurement results depends on the measured source.
Meas. type
Symbol
Description
Graphic / formula
Mean value
Mean
Arithmetic average of the complete displayed waveform.
Mean 
1
Source
analog, math,
reference, digital
N
xk
N 
k 1
RMS value
RMS
RMS (Root Mean Square) value of the
voltage of the complete displayed waveform.
Crest factor
Crest
The crest factor is also known as peakto-average ratio. It is the maximum value
divided by the RMS value of the displayed waveform.
Standard deviation
σ
Standard deviation of the displayed
waveform.
Minimum
Min
1
RMS 
N
Crest 
σ
N
xk
analog, math,
reference
2
k 1
analog, math,
reference
Max | x k |
RMS
N
1
x k  Mean2
N  1 k 1

Minimum value within the displayed
waveform.
analog, math,
reference
analog, math,
reference
Min
Maximum
Max
Maximum value within the displayed
waveform.
Max
analog, math,
reference
Peak to peak
Pk-Pk
Difference of maximum and minimum
values.
Max
analog, math,
reference
Pk-Pk
Min
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
76
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Automatic Measurements
Meas. type
Symbol
Description
Base level
Base
Low level of the displayed waveform the lower maximum of the sample distribution. The measurement requires at
least one complete period of the signal.
Graphic / formula
Source
analog, math,
reference
Base
Top level
Top
High level of the displayed waveform the upper maximum of the sample distribution. The measurement requires at
least one complete period of the signal.
Top
analog, math,
reference
Amplitude
Amp
Difference between the top level and the
base level of the signal. The measurement requires at least one complete
period of the signal.
Top
analog, math,
reference
Overshoot
Over
in %
Overshoot of a square wave after a rising or falling edge. It is calculated from
measurement values top level, base
level, local maximum, local minimum,
and amplitude.
Amplitude
Base
Over  
Max local  Top
 100 %
Amplitude
Over  
Base  Minlocal
 100 %
Amplitude
analog, math,
reference
Over+
Top
Amplitude
Base
Preshoot
Pre
in %
Overshoot of a square wave before a rising or falling edge.
Over-
Same equations as overshoot
Pre+
Top
analog, math,
reference
Amplitude
Base
AC
AC
in V
RMS value of the AC part of a periodic
signal, calculated over all periods on the
display. The AC result is is derived from
the DC and AC+DC results.
Preanalog, math,
reference
AC
DC
N T
DC
DC
in V
AC+DC
AC+DC
in V
Mean value of a periodic signal, calculated over all periods on the display. If no
complete period is available, only the
mean value of the visible waveform is
calculated.
RMS value of a periodic signal, calculated over all periods on the display. If no
complete period is available, only the
RMS value of the visible waveform is
calculated.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
analog, math,
reference
DC
N T
AC² + DC²
AC
analog, math,
reference
DC
N T
77
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Automatic Measurements
3.2.2.3
Meas. type
Counting
Symbol
Description
Graphic / formula
Sources
Positive pulse
count
Number of positive pulses on the display. The mean value of the signal is
determined. If the signal passes the
mean value, an edge is counted. A positive pulse is counted if a rising edge and
a following falling edge are detected.
1
2
3
N
Analog, math,
reference, digital
Negative pulse
count
Number of negative pulses on the display. The mean value of the signal is
determined. If the signal passes the
mean value, an edge is counted. A negative pulse is counted if a falling edge
and a following rising edge are detected.
1
2
3
N
Analog, math,
reference, digital
Rising edge count
Number of rising edges on the display.
The instrument determines the mean
value of the signal and counts an edge
every time the signal passes the mean
value in the specified direction.
1
2
3
N
Analog, math,
reference, digital
Falling edge count
Number of falling edges on the display.
The instrument determines the mean
value of the signal and counts an edge
every time the signal passes the mean
value in the specified direction.
1
2
3
N
Analog, math,
reference, digital
3.2.2.4
Power Measurements
Power measurements require two sources, one voltage source and one current
source.
Meas. type
Symbol
Description
Graphic / formula
Sources
Active power
P
Active or real power is the energy of the
system that can be used to do work.
Im
2 sources:
in W
S
φ
Re
P
Apparent power
S
in VA
Complex power S is the magnitude of
the vector sum of real and reactive
power.
2 sources:
Im
S
φ
P
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
analog, math,
reference, digital
Q
analog, math,
reference, digital
Q
Re
78
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Automatic Measurements
Meas. type
Symbol
Description
Graphic / formula
Sources
Reactive power
Q
Reactive power is temporally stored in a
system because of the inductive and
capacitive elements.
Im
2 sources:
in var
S
φ
Re
P
Power factor
PF
(no unit)
Power factor is a measure of the system
efficiency. The value varies between -1
and 1.
analog, math,
reference, digital
Q
PF = cos(φ)
2 sources:
Im
analog, math,
reference, digital
S
φ
P
Q
Re
3.2.3 Measurement Settings
Access: "Meas" menu
Measurement
Selects the measurement to be configured in the menu. You can perform up to four different measurements simultaneously.
State
Enables or disables the selected measurement.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:ENABle on page 188
Type
Selects the measurement type. For a detailed description, see Chapter 3.2.2, "Measurement Types", on page 74.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:TYPE on page 189
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
79
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Cursor Measurements
Source / Source 2
Defines the waveform to be measured. For delay, phase, and power measurements, 2
sources are required.
The sources can be any active input signal, math or reference waveform. Available
source waveforms depend on the measurement type, see Chapter 3.2.2, "Measurement Types", on page 74.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:SOURce on page 188
All off
Disables all active measurements.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:AOFF on page 189
Slope
Sets the slope for the delay measurement type.
"Positive"
Delay between the first rising edge of each source waveform.
"Negative"
Delay between the first falling edge of each source waveform.
"Either"
Delay between the first edge of each source waveform, no matter if it
is rising or falling.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe on page 190
3.3 Cursor Measurements
The cursor measurement determines the results at the current cursor positions, or
between the cursor lines. The cursors can be positioned manually at fixed positions, or
they can follow the waveform.
You can perform cursor measurements on analog input signals, math waveform, XYdiagram, as well as on logic channels and buses (requires option R&S RTH-B1).
► To configure the cursor measurement, long-press the CURSOR key.
► To start and stop the last configured measurement, press the CURSOR key.
3.3.1 Cursor Types and Results
The results of cursor measurements are displayed at the top of the display.
4 cursor types are available.
Vertical cursors
For vertical cursors, two results are displayed by default: the absolute value of the time
difference between the cursor lines Δt and its inverse value 1/Δt. Optionally, the posi-
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
80
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Cursor Measurements
tions of the cursor lines t1 and t2 are also measured. The results are time values and
do not depend on any waveform, thus no source is required.
●
CURSor:TDELta? on page 193
●
CURSor:ITDelta? on page 193
●
CURSor:X1Position on page 193
●
CURSor:X2Position on page 193
Horizontal cursors
For horizontal cursors, the vertical values of the cursor positions y1 and y2 are measured. These are usually voltage or current values. The absolute value of the difference between the positions Δy is also displayed.
●
CURSor:Y1Position on page 193
●
CURSor:Y2Position on page 193
●
CURSor:DELTa? on page 193
Track cursors
Two vertical cursor lines are coupled to the waveform. The instrument measures the
vertical values y1 and y2 of the crossings between the cursor lines and the waveform.
It also measures the absolute values of the difference between the positions Δy and of
the time difference between the cursor lines Δt
●
CURSor:Y1AMplitude? on page 194
●
CURSor:Y2AMplitude? on page 194
●
CURSor:DELTa? on page 193
●
CURSor:TDELta? on page 193
Measurements
Two vertical cursor lines define a gate for two parallel automatic measurements. All
automatic measurements that need only one source are available. Delay, phase, and
power measurements are not provided for cursor measurements, they require two
sources.
See Chapter 3.2.2, "Measurement Types", on page 74.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
81
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Cursor Measurements
If the measurement result is outside the measurement range and clipping occurs, the
results are marked with < (underflow) or > (overflow). Adjust the vertical scale to get
valid results.
●
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:ACTual? on page 194
●
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:LIMit? on page 194
3.3.2 Settings for Cursor Measurements
Access: "Cursor" menu
State
Enables or disables the cursor measurement.
Remote command:
CURSor:STATe on page 191
Type
Defines the type of the cursor measurement.
For details, see Chapter 3.3.1, "Cursor Types and Results", on page 80.
"Vertical"
Displays two vertical cursor lines and measures their timing parameters.
"Horizontal"
Displays two horizontal cursor lines and measures their amplitude
parameters.
"Track"
Displays two vertical cursor lines and couples them to the source
waveform. The amplitude characteristcs and the time difference of
the crossing points are measured.
"Measure"
Displays two vertical cursor lines that define a gate for two simultaneous automatic measurements.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
82
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Cursor Measurements
Remote command:
CURSor:FUNCtion on page 191
Source
Defines the source on which the cursor measurement is performed. The source can be
any active analog or digital input signal, math waveform, or bus (requires option).
The source setting is not available for the cursor type "Vertical", and for measurements
in the XY-diagram.
Remote command:
CURSor:SOURce on page 191
Show Position
Shows the position values of the vertical cursor lines t1 and t2 in the measurement
results. The setting is only available for the vertical cursor type.
Meas Type 1 / Meas Type 2
Set the automatic measurements to be performed on the source waveform between
the cursor lines. The setting is only available for the "Measure" cursor type.
All automatic measurements that need only one source are available. Delay, phase,
and power measurements are not provided for cursor measurements, they require two
sources.
For a description of the measurement types, see Chapter 3.2.2, "Measurement Types",
on page 74.
Remote command:
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:TYPE on page 192
Track Scaling
If enabled, the position of the cursor lines is adjusted if the vertical or horizontal scales
are changed. The cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform.
If disabled, the cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is
changed.
Remote command:
CURSor:SCPLing on page 192
Coupling
Couples the cursor lines so that the distance between the two lines remains the same
if one cursor is moved.
Remote command:
CURSor:COUPling on page 191
Set to Screen
Sets the cursors to a default position on the screen. This is helpful if the cursors have
disappeared from the display or need to be moved for a larger distance.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
83
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Mathematics
Remote command:
CURSor:SCReen on page 192
3.4 Mathematics
A math waveform is a calculated waveform. You can calculate data out of one or two
different sources using several predefined operations.
► To configure the math waveform, long-press the MATH key.
► To activate or deactivate the last configured math waveform, press the MATH key.
► To adjust vertical scale and position of the math waveform, use the RANGE and
POS keys.
You can analyize math waveforms in the same way as channel waveforms: use zoom,
perform automatic and cursor measurements, save as reference waveform, and perform mask tests.
Description of settings
State
Activates the waveform and displays it.
Remote command:
REFCurve:STATe on page 196
CALCulate:MATH:STATe on page 195
Source 1 / Source 2
Sets the source(s) for the defined mathematic operation.
Operation
Select an operation to calculate the math waveform.
"S1 + S2"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Addition: Adds the values of "Source 1" and ""Source 2"".
84
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Mathematics
"S1 - S2"
Subtraction: Subtracts the values of "Source 2" from the values of
"Source 1".
"S1 * S2"
Multiplication: Multiplies the values of "Source 1" and "Source 2".
"-S1,"
Inverse: Inverts all voltage values of "Source 1", i.e. all values are
mirrored at the ground level. Thus, a positive voltage offset becomes
negative.
"|S1|"
Abs. Value: Calculates the absolute value of "Source 1". All negative
values are inverted to positive values.
"S12"
Square: Squares the value of "Source 1".
Remote command:
CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] on page 195
RANGE keys
The vertical RANGE keys set the vertical scale (vertical sensitivity) of the math waveform.
Remote command:
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:SCALe on page 195
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:RANGe on page 196
POS keys
Move the math waveform or down in the diagram. The position is a graphical setting
given in divisions.
You can also drag the waveform marker on the screen.
Remote command:
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:POSition on page 196
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
85
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Reference Waveforms
3.5 Reference Waveforms
To compare waveforms and analyze differences between waveforms, you can use a
reference waveform. You can also save reference waveforms and load them for further
use. The display of a reference waveform is independent from that of the source waveform; you can change the vertical scale and position
To create and save a reference waveform
1. Set up the waveform that will be the reference.
2. Open the "Ref" menu.
3. Select the "Source" waveform.
4. Select "Update".
The reference waveform is created, activated, and shown on top of the original
waveform.
5. You can change the vertical scale and position using the RANGE and POS keys.
6. To save the reference, select "Save".
7. Select the "File Type" (format BIN, XML, or CSV).
8. Select the "File Name" and enter the file name.
3.5.1 Settings for Reference Waveforms
Access: "Ref" menu
Source
Selects the waveform to be taken as reference waveform. Any active channel or math
waveform can be used.
Remote command:
REFCurve:SOURce on page 196
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
86
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Reference Waveforms
Update
Creates the reference waveform from the source waveform.
Remote command:
REFCurve:UPDate on page 196
State
Activates the waveform and displays it.
Remote command:
REFCurve:STATe on page 196
CALCulate:MATH:STATe on page 195
Vertical Position
Sets the vertical position of the reference waveform.
You can also tap the waveform label "R" to set the focus to the reference waveform,
and use the RANGE and POS keys to adjust the display.
Remote command:
REFCurve:POSition on page 197
Save / Load
Saves or loads a reference waveform. The default directory is C:/Users/<user>/
Rohde-Schwarz/RTH/ReferenceCurves.
Select the "File Type" (format BIN, XML, or CSV) and enter the "File Name". See also
Chapter 3.5.2, "Waveform Files", on page 87.
Remote command:
REFCurve:NAME on page 197
REFCurve:SAVE on page 197
REFCurve:OPEN on page 197
REFCurve:DELete on page 197
3.5.2 Waveform Files
Reference waveforms can be stored in XML, CSV, or BIN format.
If you want to reload reference waveforms on the instrument, save them in BIN or CSV
format. XML files cannot be reloaded.
Waveform data is saved in two files. One file contains the waveform data values and is
indicated by *Wfm.* in the file name. The second file contains the header data, for
example, time scale, vertical scale, vertical position, acquisition mode, and more.
Header data is required to reload the waveform from data, or to analyze the data values of the data file.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
87
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
Reference Waveforms
3.5.2.1
Waveform Header Files
The header files of XML and BIN waveform files are written in XML format. The header
files of CSV waveform files are written in CSV format. You can open the header files
and use their information for data analysis.
CSV header files only contain the property names and values, one property per row.
VerticalScale:0.05:
HorizontalScale:5e-08:
XML header files contain more information than CSV header files. For analysis, only
Name and Value are needed.
<Prop Name="VerticalScale" Value="0.05" UserValue="0.05" Step="0.001" Default="0.05"
Min="0.001" Max="100" StepDefault="0.001" StepFactor="10" UnitId="77"
UnitName="V/div" BitGroupSize="0" Format="0"></Prop>
<Prop Name="HorizontalScale" Value="1e-07" UserValue="1e-07" Step="1e-09"
Default="1e-07" Min="1e-09" Max="500" StepDefault="1e-09" StepFactor="10"
UnitId="75" UnitName="s/div" BitGroupSize="0" Format="0"></Prop>
Header files contain the following properties:
Value
Description
Vertical settings
VerticalScale
Vertical scale of the waveform in Volts per division, or other unit / division
VerticalOffset
Vertical offset of the waveform in Volts, or other unit
VerticalPosition
Vertical position of the waveform in divisions
Horizontal and acquisition settings
HorizontalScale
Time scale in seconds per division
HorizontalLeft
Horizontal start value of the waveform (time in s)
HorizontalResolutionPP
Time between two recorded samples
HorizontalAcquisitionMode
Sample, Peak Detect, High Res, Envelope, or Average
HorizontalDecimationFactor
At long time bases, if the number of captured samples is higher than the
available record length, decimation takes effect. If the time scale is ≤5 μs/
div, the decimation factor is 1.
Samples
HorizontalTraceLength
Record length, number of recorded waveform samples, which are stored
in the memory
PostSettlingSamples
Number of additional samples after the end of the waveform record.
PreSettlingSamples
Number of additional samples before the beginning of waveform samples.
They ensure that all measurements can be performed on the reloaded
waveform that could be performed on the original waveform.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
88
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
XY-Diagram
3.5.2.2
Waveform Data Files
The waveform data files are indicated by *Wfm.* in the file name. They contain the
actual waveform data, the Y-values of the samples. Mostly, the Y-values are voltages:
Y0; Y1; Y2; Y3; ...
Before and after the waveform data, the instrument writes some presettling and postsettling samples. The overall number of values in the data file is:
ValuesNumber = PreSettlingSamples + HorizontalTraceLength + PostSettlingSamples
For envelope waveforms, the number of values in the file doubles. Two Y-values for
each sample are written, one for the upper and one for the lower envelope:
Ymin0; Ymax0; Ymin1; Ymax1; Ymin2; Ymax2; Ymin3; Ymax3;...
In peak detect acquisition mode, the number of values depends on the decimation factor. If the decimation factor is 1, one value per sample is written. At higher decimation
factors, two values per sample are written.
In CSV files, the data values of one sample are written in one row. Envelope data, for
example, looks like this:
-0.0125490196078431
-0.0619607843137255
-0.0133333333333333
-0.0627450980392157
-0.0149019607843137
-0.0650980392156863
XML files are easy to read:
<sample>
<datamax>-0.012549</datamax>
<datamin>-0.0619608</datamin>
</sample>
<sample>
<datamax>-0.0133333</datamax>
<datamin>-0.0627451</datamin>
</sample>
<sample>
<datamax>-0.014902</datamax>
<datamin>-0.065098</datamin>
</sample>
3.6 XY-Diagram
XY-diagrams combine the voltage or current levels of two input signals in one diagram.
They use the level of a second signal as the x-axis, rather than a time base. This
allows you to perform phase shift measurements, for example.
1. Press the MODE key.
2. Select "XY".
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
89
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
History (Option R&S RTH-K15)
3. Make sure that the signals, the trigger, and the acquisition are set up correctly. The
following menus are available in XY-mode:
●
●
●
●
"Vertical", see Chapter 2.2, "Vertical Setup", on page 40.
"Horizontal", see Chapter 2.3, "Horizontal Setup", on page 43.
"Trigger", see Chapter 2.5, "Trigger", on page 47.
"Acquire", see Chapter 2.4, "Acquisition Control", on page 45.
To analyze the signal in XY-mode, you can use cursor measurements. You can select
vertical or horizontal cursors, couple the cursor lines or set them to screen. All other
cursor settings are not relevant for measuring the XY-diagram.
Description of settings
Source X
Defines the signal that supplies the x-values of the XY-diagram, replacing the usual
time base. The source can be any of the active analog channels.
Source Y
Defines the signal to be displayed in y-direction in an XY-diagram. The source can be
any of the active analog channels.
3.7 History (Option R&S RTH-K15)
The history option R&S RTH-K15 accesses the data of previous acquisitions and provides them for further analysis. Using this option, you can analyze, for example, packet
communication on serial buses, radar pulses, laser pulses, and signals that occur in
short bursts with long idle times.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
90
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
History (Option R&S RTH-K15)
If history is enabled and an acquisition runs, the instrument stores the captured waveforms, processes the data and displays the current waveform. Each stored waveform is
called a segment. When the acquisition is stopped, the history player is shown to
access the stored segments, and to display and analyze them. When you start a new
acquisition, the history is cleared and written anew.
The history stores the following data during acquisition:
●
All active analog channels.
●
All logic channels if at least one logic is active (with option R&S RTH-B1).
●
Decoded bus data if the bus is active (with option R&S RTH-K1 and/or R&S RTHK2).
To enable the history:
1. Tap the Menu button and select "History" on the menu.
2. Enable "History".
3.7.1 History Settings
Access: "History" menu
History
Enables the history function. The instrument stores the captured waveforms in segments. After stopping the acquisition, you can analyze them.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:HISTory[:STATe] on page 198
Number of Segments
Sets the number of segments to be stored.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
91
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
History (Option R&S RTH-K15)
Note: If zoom or mathematics are active during acquisition, the actual number of
stored segments may be less than the defined number. To avoid the decrease of
stored waveforms, disable zoom and mathematics before you acquire the waveforms.
You can enable zoom and mathematics later in stop mode and use them to analyze
any of the history segments.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:NSEGments on page 198
Player Speed
Defines how fast the history player shows the stored segments.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TPACq on page 198
Player Control Position
Sets the position of the history player window on the display. You can drag the window
on the touchscreen to another position. If so, a "User" position is indicated.
Available Acquisition
Shows the number of segments that are currently stored in the history.
Remote command:
ACQuire:AVAilable? on page 198
Start Acquisition / Stop Acquisition
Define the index of the first and the last history segment that the history player shows.
Change these values if you want to see a smaller range of subsequent segments from
the history. The newest segment has always the index "0". Older segments have a
negative index. The number of available segments is shown in "Available Acquisition".
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt on page 198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STOP on page 199
Time Format
Defines if the timestamp in the history player window shows the absolute or relative
time. Absolute time is the date and the daytime of the current acquisition. Relative time
is the difference to the newest segment (index = 0).
See also "Timestamp" on page 93.
3.7.2 Displaying History Data
In the history player window, you start and stop the playback of the stored segments,
and you can display a particular acquisition.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
92
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
History (Option R&S RTH-K15)
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
Timestamp, here: absolute time
Index of the oldest, current, and newest (= 0) segment
Slider to set the displayed segment
Control buttons: Play, Step Forward, Step Back, and Repeat
Timestamp
The timestamp shows the time of the currently displayed history segment. Thus, the
time relation between acquisitions is always available. More precisely, the timestamp is
the time of the trigger event.
The timestamp can be absolute or relative:
●
Absolute: Date and daytime of the trigger event of the displayed segment.
Depending on the horizontal position, the waveform can be captured up to 100,000
seconds after the trigger event, and thus after the displayed timestamp. The instrument considers this delay automatically, all measurements are related to the trigger
event.
●
Relative: time difference of the current segment to the newest segment (index = 0).
Remote command:
●
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute? on page 200
●
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate? on page 200
●
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative? on page 200
To display history segments
You can access the history segments in several ways:
●
Play back all captured history segments.
●
Play back a specified range of subsequent segments.
●
Show one particular segment.
Proceed as follows:
1. If the acquisition is running, stop the acquisition.
The history player is shown.
2. To play back the segments once, tap the Play button.
By default, all captured waveforms are shown.
3. To display a range of segments out of the history:
a) Open the "History" menu.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
93
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Waveform Analysis
History (Option R&S RTH-K15)
b) Set the index of the first and the last segment that you want to see.
See "Start Acquisition / Stop Acquisition" on page 92.
c) In the history player window, tap the Play button.
4. To play back the segments repeatedly.
a) Enable the Repeat button.
b) Tap the Play button.
5. To access a particular segment, you can:
●
●
Drag the slider in the history player window, until the required index number is
shown.
Use the Step Forward and Step Back buttons to show the next segment.
Remote command:
●
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAY on page 199
●
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:REPLay on page 199
●
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent on page 199
3.7.3 Analyzing History Data
You can analyze the stored segments using the following possibilities:
●
Switch analog channels on and off if they were active during acquisition.
●
Change vertical scale and position of captured channels.
●
Use the zoom.
●
Save screenshots.
●
Perform cursor measurements.
●
Perform automatic measurements.
●
Use the mathematical functions.
●
Switch logic channels on and off if at least one channel was active during acquisition.
●
Enable and disable the serial bus if it was active during acquisition.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
94
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Mask Testing
Mask Test Results
4 Mask Testing
Masks are used to determine whether the amplitude of a signal remains within specified limits, e.g. to detect errors or test compliance of digital signals.
A mask is specified by an upper and a lower limit line. The signal must run inside these
limit lines, otherwise a mask violation occurs. A new mask is created from an existing
signal: Mask limits are created by copying the waveform, and the limits are moved and
stretched. The result is a tolerance tube around the signal that is used as mask.
4.1 Accessing the Mask Mode
1. Press the MODE key.
2. Select "Mask".
The mask interface is displayed and mask testing is started if masks are already
defined and activated.
4.2 Mask Test Results
Mask testing checks all active waveforms for mask violation simultaneously.
The test result of the selected mask is shown in the result table in the upper left corner
of the display.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
95
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Mask Testing
Running Mask Tests
Figure 4-1: Mask-mode-view
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
Selected channel
Number and percentage share of passed acquisitions
Number and percentage share of failed acquisitions
Number of tested acquisitions
Test duration
Remote commands for mask test results:
●
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS[:COUNt]? on page 203
●
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS:PERCentage? on page 203
●
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL[:COUNt]? on page 203
●
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL:PERCentage? on page 202
●
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:TOTL[:COUNt]? on page 204
●
MASK:ELAPsedtime:TOTal? on page 204
●
MASK:ELAPsedtime[:SECS]? on page 204
●
MASK[:TESTstate]? on page 202
4.3 Running Mask Tests
1. Before you can perform mask tests, adjust the waveforms by editing the vertical,
horizontal, trigger and acquisition settings.
For details see:
● Chapter 2.2, "Vertical Setup", on page 40
● Chapter 2.3, "Horizontal Setup", on page 43
● Chapter 2.5, "Trigger", on page 47
● Chapter 2.4, "Acquisition Control", on page 45
Note: The acquisition mode "Envelope" is not available while running mask tests.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
96
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Mask Testing
Mask Settings
2. If you want to test a mathematical (math) waveform, generate a math waveform,
see Chapter 3.4, "Mathematics", on page 84.
3. Select the "Mask" menu.
4. Select the mask channel that is assigned to the tested waveform.
5. To activate the mask, tap "State".
Note: If the selected mask was used before, the stored mask is displayed.
6. To set the mask width, enter "Width X" and "Width Y".
7. Select the "Action on Violation".
This action is applied to all masks.
8. To create the mask, tap "Create Mask".
9. To start and stop mask testing, press the RUN STOP key.
Analyzing the mask test
To view the details of the waveform at a mask test violation, you can use the zoom
function, see Chapter 3.1, "Zoom", on page 72. Zooming is only possible while the
mask test is stopped.
4.4 Mask Settings
Access: "Mask" menu
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
97
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Mask Testing
Mask Settings
Figure 4-2: Mask settings
Reset all Mask Results
Resets all mask test results.
Remote command:
MASK:RST on page 202
Coupling
If enabled, the settings of the selected mask are applied to all active masks when you
tap "Create Mask".
Mask Channel
Selects the mask to be configured.
If the selected mask has been created before, and it is active, the mask is shown on
the display.
Each mask channel is assigned to its related waveform (input channel or math waveform) as indicated by the mask channel name.
State
Turns the mask on or off.
If the assigned waveform is inactive, it is activated together with the mask.
Remote command:
MASK:CHANnel<m>:STATe on page 201
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
98
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Mask Testing
Mask Settings
Width X
Changes the width of the mask in horizontal direction.
The specified number of divisions in divisions is added to the positive x-values and
subtracted from the negative x-values of the mask limits in relation to the mask center.
Thus, the left half of the mask is pulled to the left, the right half is pulled to the right.
To apply the changed value to an existing mask, tap "Create Mask".
Remote command:
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:XWIDth on page 201
Width Y
Changes the width of the mask in vertical direction.
The specified number of divisions is added to the y-values of the upper mask limit and
subtracted from the y-values of the lower mask limit. Thus, the upper half of the mask
is pulled upwards, the lower half is pulled down, and the overall height of the mask is
twice the "Width Y".
To apply the changed value to an existing mask, tap "Create Mask".
Remote command:
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:YWIDth on page 201
Create Mask
Creates a new mask, or applies modified mask settings to the mask.
If "Coupling" is enabled, all active masks are recreated with the settings of the selected
mask.
Remote command:
MASK:CHANnel<m>:CREatemask on page 201
Action on Violation
Selects the action to be executed if the mask limits are violated.
This action is applied to all masks.
Remote command:
MASK:ONViolation[:SELection] on page 202
Save all Masks
Opens an explorer to save all active masks.
Load all Masks
Opens an explorer to load masks.
If an acquisition is running, the acquisition is topped until the masks are reloaded.
RUN / STOP
Starts and stops triggering on mask violations.
Remote command:
RUN on page 166
STOP on page 166
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
99
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004)
5 Multimeter Measurements
The 4-channel R&S RTH1004 has 4 software-based voltmeters, which can measure in
parallel. For each voltmeter you can select the source and measurement type. See
Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004).
The 2-channel R&S RTH1002 has a hardware-based digital multimeter with two separate banana plug inputs for various multimeter measurements. Except for voltages, the
DMM can also measure resistance, capacitance, temperature and more. See Digital
Multimeter (R&S RTH1002).
5.1 Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004)
The software-based voltmeter features AC, DC, AC+DC voltage measurements. Current measurements are also possible if you use a shunt resistor or I/U converter.
5.1.1 Accessing the Meter Mode
1. Press the MODE key.
2. Select "Meter".
The multimeter interface is displayed.
5.1.2 Display and Control
The voltmeter display shows all 4 voltmeters at a glance, or only one voltmeter with
details and setup icons.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
100
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004)
Figure 5-1: One-voltmeter-view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Measurement state. Manual: running measurement
Probe settings
Minimum value and time stamp
Average value
Maximum value and time stamp
Warning sign, shows up if the measured value is higher than 30 V
Bar graph displaying the measured value
Measurement source (input channel). Selected source is highlighted.
Measurement type (AC, DC or AC+DC). Selected type is highlighted.
Restarts the measurement and resets all values
Activates or deactivates relative measurement
On/Off-Switch to turn selected meter on or off
Displayed voltmeter, indicated by highlighted number
The buttons at the bottom of the display offer the following quick settings:
●
Input Signal
●
Measure Type
●
Restart Test
●
Relative
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
101
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004)
Figure 5-2: Four-voltmeter-view
1 = Channel measured by the voltmeter
2 = Bar graph displaying the measured value
3 = Channel range
Remote command:
●
METer<m>:READ? on page 205
●
METer<m>:FETCh? on page 206
In meter mode, the keys behave slightly different from scope mode:
●
The vertical RANGE and POS keys both adjust the range of the selected input
channel.
●
The MEAS key opens the "Meter" menu.
●
The following keys work as usual: FILE,
BACK.
●
All other keys do not work.
,
, PRESET, AUTOSET, MODE,
Displaying voltmeters
► To switch to one-voltmeter-view, use one of the following methods:
●
●
Tap the meter number as shown in Figure 5-2.
Turn the wheel to select a voltmeter, and press the wheel button to open it.
► To view all 4 voltmeters, use one of the following methods:
●
●
Tap the highlighted number of the opened voltmeter as shown in Figure 5-1.
Press BACK.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
102
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004)
5.1.3 Running Voltmeter Measurements
1. Select the "Vertical" menu and adjust the "Probe Setting" for all channels to be
measured.
See also "Probe Setting" on page 42.
2. If the 4-voltmeter-view is shown, switch to the one-voltmeter-view, see "Displaying
voltmeters" on page 102.
3. Select the channel to be measured (no. 8 in Figure 5-1).
4. Select the measurement type (no. 9).
5. Activate the voltmeter (no. 12)
6. To adjust the measurement range manually, press the RANGE keys.
7. If you want to get relative result values:
a) Activate "Relative" (no. 11).
b) To set a user-defined reference value, open the "Meter" menu, activate "Reference", and enter the value in "Reference Manual".
Alternatively, you can select the voltmeter and adjust the meter settings in the "Meter"
menu.
5.1.4 Voltmeter Settings
Access: "Meter" menu
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
103
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Voltmeter (R&S RTH1004)
Figure 5-3: Voltmeter settings
Select Meter
Selects one of the 4 voltmeters and displays its settings in the menu.
State
Switches the selected meter on or off.
Remote command:
METer<m>:SENSe:STATe on page 204
Measure Type
Sets the measurement type for the selected meter.
Note: The AC coupling is activated if the selected channel is only used for AC measurements. If the selected channel is also used for DC or AC+DC measurement, the
AC coupling is deactivated and the AC value is calculated out of the AC+DC and DC
values. The precision of the results is reduced.
Menu icon
Meter icon
Description
AC voltage or current measurement
AC+DC voltage or current (RMS) measurement
DC voltage or current measurement
Note: An external shunt resistor or I/U converter is needed for current measurement.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
104
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Digital Multimeter (R&S RTH1002)
Input Signal
Selects the channel which is measured by the selected meter.
Remote command:
METer<m>:SENSe:SOURce on page 205
Relative
Activates or deactivates relative measurement. If you activate this function, the currently measured value is taken as reference value. Instead of the bar graph, the reference value and the measured value are displayed (see Figure 5-4). You can also set a
desired value as reference value, see "Reference / Reference Manual" on page 105.
Figure 5-4: Relative measurement
1 = Reference value
2 = Measured value relative to reference value
Reference / Reference Manual
"Reference" activates or deactivates the manual reference value.
If active, enter the reference value in "Reference Manual".
Restart Test
Restarts the measurement.
Remote command:
RUN on page 166
STOP on page 166
RANGE / POS
In meter mode, the vertical RANGE and POS keys adjust the measurement range of
the selected channel.
Remote command:
METer<m>:SENSe:RANGe on page 205
5.2 Digital Multimeter (R&S RTH1002)
The hardware-based digital multimeter features various multimeter measurements.
Except for voltages, the DMM can also measure resistance, capacitance, temperature
and more.
In "Meter" mode, a separate self-alignment of the meter inputs is available, see Chapter 10.2, "Selfalignment", on page 144.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
105
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Digital Multimeter (R&S RTH1002)
5.2.1 Accessing the Meter Mode
► There are several ways to start the multimeter mode:
●
Press the DMM key.
●
Press the MODE key, and select "Meter".
●
To start relative measurements, press the DMM REL key.
The multimeter interface is displayed, and the measurement is started immediately.
5.2.2 Display and Control
The multimeter display shows detailed results and setup icons.
Figure 5-5: Display of the digital multimeter
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
=
=
=
=
Measurement state. Manual: running measurement
Measurement range
Test lead connection including polarity
Minimum value and timestamp
Average value
Maximum value and timestamp
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
106
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Digital Multimeter (R&S RTH1002)
7
8
9
10
11
=
=
=
=
=
Warning sign, shows up if the measured value is higher than 30 V
Bar graph displaying the measured value
Measurement type
Activates or deactivates relative measurement
Restarts the measurement and resets all values
Remote command:
●
METer<m>:READ? on page 205
●
METer<m>:FETCh? on page 206
In meter mode, the keys behave slightly different from scope mode:
●
The vertical RANGE and POS keys adjust the measurement range.
●
The MEAS key opens the "Meter" menu.
●
The following keys work as usual: FILE,
BACK.
●
The CH keys switch back to the scope mode.
●
All other keys do not work.
,
, PRESET, AUTOSET, MODE,
5.2.3 Running Multimeter Measurements
1. Connect the test leads to the meter inputs.
2. Select the "Meter" mode.
3. Select the measurement type (no. 9 in Figure 5-5).
4. To adjust the measurement range, press the RANGE keys.
5. For current and temperature measurements, adjust the "Probe Setting".
6. For continuity measurement, adjust the "Resistance Threshold".
7. If you want to get relative result values:
a) Activate "Relative" (no. 10).
b) To set a user-defined reference value, open the "Meter" menu, activate "Reference", and enter the value in "Reference Manual".
8. To stop the meter measurement, press the RUN STOP key.
5.2.4 Settings
Access: "Meter" menu
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
107
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Digital Multimeter (R&S RTH1002)
Figure 5-6: Digital multimeter settings
Meter Type
Sets the measurement type for the multimeter.
Meter icon
"Meter Type"
Description
"V AC"
AC voltage measurement
"V DC"
DC voltage measurement
"V AC+DC"
AC+DC voltage (RMS) measurement
"A AC"
AC current measurement
"A DC"
DC current measurement
"A AC+DC"
AC+DC current (RMS) measurement
"Resistance"
Resistance measurement
"Continuity Test" Continuity measurement
"Diode Test"
Diode measurement
"Capacitance"
Capacity measurement
"Temperature"
Temperature measurement (an adapter is required)
"Frequency"
Frequency measurement
Resistance Threshold
This setting is only relevant for continuity measurement. If the measured voltage drops
below the "Resistance Threshold", the instrument beeps.
Probe Setting
Sets the sensitivity factor of the current probe for current measurements.
Sets the adapter type for temperature measurements.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
108
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Multimeter Measurements
Digital Multimeter (R&S RTH1002)
Relative
Activates or deactivates relative measurement. If you activate this function, the currently measured value is taken as reference value. Instead of the bar graph, the reference value and the measured value are displayed. You can also set a desired value as
reference value, see "Reference / Reference Manual" on page 109.
You can also activate or deactivate relative measurement by pressing DMM REL.
1 = Reference value
2 = Actual value relative to reference value
Reference / Reference Manual
"Reference" activates or deactivates the setting of a manual reference value.
If active, enter the reference value in "Reference Manual".
Restart Test
Restarts the measurement.
RANGE / POS
In meter mode, the vertical RANGE and POS keys adjust the measurement range
DMM.
Remote command:
METer<m>:SENSe:RANGe on page 205
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
109
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Logger Display
6 Data Logging
The data logger records scope or meter data captured of up to 4 different measurements. The logging can last up to 23 days. The records are displayed as an on-screenchart and can be stored in 10 different slots. Using the "Zoom" and "Cursor" functions,
logged data can be analyzed.
6.1 Accessing the Logger Mode
1. Press the MODE key.
2. Select "Logger".
The logger interface is displayed.
If a scope measurement or meter measurement is running, the logging is started
automatically when you enter the logger mode.
6.2 Logger Display
If you log data of scope measurements, you can log all active measurements at once.
The logger display shows all logs with latest results at a glance, or one log with latest
and statistical results.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
110
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Logging Data
Figure 6-1: Logger display, view of all logged scope measurements
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Logged measurements
Latest values of the logged measurements (depends on logging type and measurement type)
Time basis
Memory slot
Recording time
Start time
Upper and lower scaling value of each measurement
Time stamp of the left side of the display
Displaying logged measurements
1. To switch to one-log-view, use one of the following methods:
●
●
Tap on one of the logged measurements as shown in Figure 6-1.
Press the assigned CH key.
2. To view all logs, use one of the following methods:
●
Tap the highlighted number of the opened log.
●
Press the CH key of the opened log.
6.3 Logging Data
You can log up to four different scope measurements or meter measurements simultaneously.
Before you start the logging, set up and activate the measurements that you want to
log. See:
●
Chapter 3.2, "Automatic Measurements", on page 74
●
Chapter 5, "Multimeter Measurements", on page 100
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
111
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Logger Settings
1. Access the logger mode, see Chapter 6.1, "Accessing the Logger Mode",
on page 110.
2. Select the "Logger" menu.
3. If data logging is running, press RUN/STOP to stop the logging. The logged data is
stored automatically. You can only adjust the logger settings if logging is stopped.
4. Select the source that you want to log.
5. Select the sample rate.
6. Select the horizontal scale.
By default, the horizontal scale is set to "auto". In this case, all logged data are
always displayed, and the scaling is adjusted automatically when the amount of
data increases..
7. Select the slot, where the logged data will be stored.
8. To start logging, press the RUN STOP key.
When you stop logging, the logged data is stored automatically in the selected slot.
Each slot stores the data of a single logging period. If you use the slot a second
time, the stored data is overwritten.
6.4 Logger Settings
Access: "Logger" menu
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
112
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Logger Settings
Source
Selects the logger source: "Scope" or "Meter".
Remote command:
LOGGer:SOURce on page 207
Sample Rate
Selects the number of log samples per second.
Remote command:
LOGGer:TIMebase:SRATe on page 207
Horizontal Scale
Selects the horizontal scale of the logged data.
The horizontal scale is set to "auto" by default. In this case, all logged data is always
displayed.
Remote command:
LOGGer:TIMebase:SCALe on page 207
Slot
Selects one of the 10 memory slots for storing the logged data.
If data is stored in a slot, the start time of the stored data is displayed in the menu. You
can change the slot during recording.
Remote command:
LOGGer:SLOT:CURRent on page 207
Load Slot
Loads the stored log data of the selected slot.
Only possible while logging is stopped.
Remote command:
LOGGer:SLOT:LOAD on page 207
Clear Slot
Deletes the log data of the selected slot.
Only possible while logging is stopped.
Remote command:
LOGGer:SLOT:CLEar on page 208
Clear All Slots
Deletes the log data of all slots.
Only possible while logging is stopped.
Remote command:
LOGGer:SLOT:CLEar on page 208
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
113
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Analyzing Logged Data
6.5 Analyzing Logged Data
You can analyze logged data using the "Cursor" and the "Zoom". To analyze logged
data at a later time, the data is stored automatically, and you can load the stored data
to the display.
6.5.1 Cursor
To analyze logged data, you can use cursor measurements, see also Chapter 3.3,
"Cursor Measurements", on page 80.
Figure 6-2: Logger display with cursors
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
=
=
=
=
Values of the crossings between the selected cursor line and the waveform
Cursor lines
Absolute value of the time difference between the cursor lines Δt = |t1-t2|
Position of the cursor line 2
Position of the cursor line 1
Time stamp of the logged signal on the left side of the display
To select one of the two cursor lines, tap a cursor line, or use the wheel to navigate
and select. The selected line is highlighted by a bold line.
Remote commands for cursor results:
●
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:POSition on page 209
●
LOGGer:CURSor:TDELta? on page 210
●
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:RESult<n>[:AMPLitude]? on page 210
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
114
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Analyzing Logged Data
The logger cursor only allows you to set a "Cursor Value". You cannot define the cursor "Type" and "Source" as you can in the "Scope" and "Mask" mode because these
settings are not relevant for logging.
Description of settings
Access: "Cursor" menu
Figure 6-3: Cursor settings
Enable
Enables or disables the cursor measurement.
Remote command:
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:STATe on page 208
Cursor Value
Sets the measured crossing point between the cursor lines and the waveform, see Figure 6-4. These settings only apply if data logging is running for more than 2 days and 7
hours. After this time, the logger compresses 4 logging values into a "Minimum", "Average" and "Maximum" value.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
115
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Analyzing Logged Data
Figure 6-4: Logger cursor with summarized data
1 = Maximum value of cursor line 1
2 = Maximum value of cursor line 2
Remote command:
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:TYPE on page 208
Track scaling
If enabled, the position of the cursor lines is adjusted if the scale is changed. The cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform.
If disabled, the cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is
changed.
Remote command:
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCPLing on page 208
Coupling
Couples the cursor lines so that the distance between the two lines remains the same
if one cursor is moved.
Remote command:
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:COUPling on page 209
Set to screen
Sets the cursors to a default position on the screen. This is helpful if the cursors have
disappeared from the display or need to be moved for a larger distance.
Remote command:
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCReen on page 209
6.5.2 Zoom
To analyze logged data, you can use the "Zoom" function, see also Chapter 3.1,
"Zoom", on page 72.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
116
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Analyzing Logged Data
The zoom is only available if enough data have been logged.
The zoom settings in logger mode are the same as in scope mode, but the time range
is much longer.
If data logging is running for more than 2 days and 7 hours, the logger compresses 4
logging values into a minimum, average and maximum value, see Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5: Logger zoom with summarized data
1 = Maximum values
2 = Average values
3 = Minimum values
Description of settings
Access: "Zoom" menu
Figure 6-6: Zoom settings
Enable
Turns the zoom on or off.
Remote command:
LOGGer:ZOOM:ENABle on page 210
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
117
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Analyzing Logged Data
Horizontal Scale
Sets the horizontal scale of the horizontal axis for all logged signals, in seconds per
division.
Remote command:
LOGGer:ZOOM:SCALe on page 211
Position / Position Date
Sets the position of the zoomed area in relation to the left side of the display.
Remote command:
LOGGer:ZOOM:POSition on page 211
6.5.3 Logger Statistics
Figure 6-7: Logger statistics
1 = Measurement results; display depends on the logger mode and the selected measurement
2 = Mean value statistic
3 = Standard deviation statistic
Statistics are only shown if a single log is displayed.
Remote commands for logger statistics:
●
LOGGer:RECording:STARt? on page 211
●
LOGGer:RECording:TOTal? on page 211
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:CURRentsampl? on page 212
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:POSition? on page 212
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:VALue? on page 212
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:POSition? on page 212
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:VALue? on page 213
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MEAN? on page 213
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev? on page 213
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:ENABled? on page 213
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:TYPE? on page 214
●
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:SOURce? on page 214
6.5.4 Loading Logged Data
Logged data can be loaded from the slot, in which they were stored.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
118
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Data Logging
Analyzing Logged Data
1. Access the logger mode, see Chapter 6.1, "Accessing the Logger Mode",
on page 110.
2. Select the "Logger" menu.
3. If a data logging is running, press RUN STOP to stop logging.
4. Select the slot with the logs that you want to display.
5. Tap "Load Slot" to display the stored logs.
6.5.5 Deleting Logged Data
Logs stored on the slots can be deleted individually or all together.
To delete logs of a single slot:
1. Select the slot with the logs which you want to delete.
2. Tap "Clear Slot".
To delete logs on all slots:
► Tap "Clear All Slots".
6.5.6 Exporting Logged Data
You can save the logger records to a CSV or MAT file for further analysis. See Chapter 9.4, "Logger Records", on page 142.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
119
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
General Protocol Settings
7 Protocol Analysis
Using the R&S RTH and additional options, you can analyze the following serial protocols:
●
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) - requires option R&S RTH-K1
●
Inter-Integrated circuit bus (I²C) - requires option R&S RTH-K1
●
UART / RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485 interfaces - require option R&S RTH-K2
The analysis of serial data consists of three main steps:
●
Protocol configuration: Select the protocol type, and configure the input line as well
as the protocol-specific settings.
●
Decoding: Select the display format of the decoded data. The digitized signal data
is displayed on the screen together with the decoded content of the messages.
You can scale the signal display and zoom into it to see it in more detail.
●
Triggering: You can trigger on various events that are typical for the configured bus
type, for example, on start and stop of messages, or on data patterns.
Analysis is performed on analog input channels, and - if MSO option R&S RTH-B1 is
installed - also on digital channels.
7.1 General Protocol Settings
Access: "Bus" menu
For all serial protocols, the following settings are required:
State
Enables the decoding and the display of the serial bus data.
Bus Protocol
Defines protocol type of the bus for configuration and trigger settings.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
120
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1)
Display Format
Sets the decoding format of the data: binary, hexadecimal, decimal, octal, or ASCII.
Remote command:
BUS:FORMat on page 214
7.2 I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1)
7.2.1 The I²C Protocol
This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics, data format, address
types and trigger possibilities. For detailed information, read the "I2C-bus specification
and user manual" available on the NXP manuals web page at http://www.nxp.com/.
I²C characteristics
Main characteristics of I²C are:
●
Two-wire design: serial clock (SCL) and serial data (SDA) lines
●
Master-slave communication: the master generates the clock and addresses the
slaves. Slaves receive the address and the clock. Both master and slaves can
transmit and receive data.
●
Addressing scheme: each slave device is addressable by a unique address. Multiple slave devices can be linked together and can be addressed by the same master.
●
Read/write bit: specifies if the master will read (=1) or write (=0) the data.
●
Acknowledge: takes place after every byte. The receiver of the address or data
sends the acknowledge bit to the transmitter.
The R&S RTH supports all operating speed modes: high-speed, fast mode plus, fast
mode, and standard mode.
Data transfer
The format of a simple I²C message (frame) with 7 bit addressing consists of the following parts:
●
Start condition: a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high
●
7-bit address of the slave device that either will be written to or read from
●
R/W bit: specifies if the data will be written to or read from the slave
●
ACKnowledge bits: is issued by the receiver of the previous byte if the transfer was
successful
Exception: At read access, the master terminates the data transmission with a
NACK bit after the last byte.
●
Data: a number of data bytes with an ACK bit after every byte
●
Stop condition: a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
121
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1)
Figure 7-1: I2C write access with 7-bit address
Address types: 7-bit and 10-bit
Slave addresses can be 7 or 10 bits long. A 7-bit address requires one byte, 7 bits for
the address followed by the R/W bit.
A 10-bit address for write access requires two bytes: the first byte starts with the
reserved sequence 11110, followed by the two MSB of the address and the write bit.
The second byte contains the remaining 8 LSB of the address. The slave acknowledges each address byte.
Figure 7-2: 10-bit address, write access
A 10-bit address for read access requires three bytes. The first two bytes are identical
to the write access address. The third byte repeats the address bits of the first byte and
sets the read bit.
Figure 7-3: 10-bit address, read access
Trigger
The R&S RTH can trigger on various parts of I²C messages. The data and clock lines
must be connected to the input channels, triggering on math and reference waveforms
is not possible.
You can trigger on:
●
Start or stop condition
●
Repeated start condition
●
Transfer direction (read or write)
●
Bytes with missing acknowledge bit
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
122
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1)
●
Specific slave address
●
Specific data pattern in the message
7.2.2 I2C Configuration Settings
Access: "Bus" menu > "Bus Protocol" = "I2C" > "Config"
SCL / SDA
Set the input source of the data line (SDA) and clock line (SCL).
If option R&S RTH-B1 is installed, digital channels can also be used as source.
Remote command:
BUS:I2C:SCL:SOURce on page 215
BUS:I2C:SDA:SOURce on page 215
Thresholds / Technology
Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals. If the signal value is higher than the
threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, the signal state is considered low.
You can select the threshold voltages for various types of integrated circuits in the
"Technology" list, or set a user-defined value in "Thresholds".
Remote command:
BUS:I2C:TECHnology on page 215
BUS:I2C:SCL:THReshold on page 215
BUS:I2C:SDA:THReshold on page 215
7.2.3 I2C Trigger Settings
Access: "Bus" menu > "Bus Protocol" = "I2C" > "Trigger"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
123
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1)
I2C Trigger
Selects the trigger type for I2C analysis.
"Start"
Sets the trigger to the start of the message. The start condition is a
falling edge on SDA while SCL is high. The trigger instant is the falling edge of the SDA line.
"Restart"
Sets the trigger to a restart - when the start condition occurs without
previous stop condition. Restart conditions occur when a master
exchanges multiple messages with a slave without releasing the bus.
"Stop"
Sets the trigger to the end of the message. The stop condition is a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high.
"No Ack (Missing Ack)"
Missing acknowledge bit: the instrument triggers if the data line
remains HIGH during the clock pulse following a transmitted byte.
You can also localize specific missing acknowledge bits by setting the
I2C Trigger Settings.
"Address"
Sets the trigger to one specific address pattern that is expected. The
trigger time is the falling clock edge of the acknowledge bit after the
address.
"Data"
Sets the trigger to a specified data pattern that is expected.
"Address and Data"
Sets the trigger to a combination of address and data condition.
No Ack (Missing Ack)
Selects which missing acknowledge bits is detected if the trigger type is set to "No Ack
(Missing Ack)".
"Address NACK"
No slave recognizes the address.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
124
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1)
"Data Read NACK"
Marks the end of the read process when the master reads data from
the slave. This Nack is sent according to the protocol definition, it is
not an error.
"Data Write NACK"
The addressed slave does not accept the data.
Address Pattern
Specifies the address pattern to be found, in binary or hex format. Enter the pattern in
MSB first bit order.
Address Relation
Sets how the defined serial address pattern is compared with the acquired signal. The
instrument triggers if the acquired address is equal or unequal the defined pattern.
R/W Bit
Toggles the trigger condition between read and write access of the master. Select
"Either" if the transfer direction is not relevant for the trigger condition.
Data Pattern
Specifies the data pattern to be found on the specified line, in binary or hex format.
Enter the words in MSB first bit order.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
125
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1)
Data Relation
Sets how the defined serial data pattern is compared with the acquired signal. The
instrument triggers if the acquired data pattern is equal or unequal the defined pattern.
Byte Offset
Sets the number of bytes before the first byte of the data pattern. These bytes are
ignored.
7.3 SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1)
7.3.1 The SPI Protocol
A 4-channel instrument is required for full support of the SPI protocol.
The Serial Peripheral Interface SPI is used for communication with slow peripheral
devices, in particular, for transmission of data streams.
Main characteristics of SPI are:
●
Master-slave communication
●
No device addressing; The slave is accessed by a chip select, or slave select line.
●
No acknowledgement mechanism to confirm receipt of data
●
Duplex capability
Most SPI buses have four lines, two data and two control lines:
●
Clock line to all slaves (SCLK)
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
126
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1)
●
Slave Select or Chip Select line (SS or CS)
●
Master data output, slave data input (MOSI or SDI)
●
Master data input, slave data output (MISO or SDO)
When the master generates a clock and selects a slave device, data may be transferred in either or both directions simultaneously.
Figure 7-4: Simple configuration of SPI bus
The data bits of a message are grouped by following criteria:
●
A word contains a number of successive bits. The word length is defined in the protocol configuration.
●
A frame contains a number of successive words, at least one word.
For SPI buses, the R&S RTH provides the following trigger possibilities:
●
On frame start
●
On frame end
●
On a serial pattern at a specified position
7.3.2 SPI Configuration Settings
Access: "Bus" menu > "Bus Protocol" = "SPI" > "Config"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
127
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1)
Source : CS / Clock / MOSI / MISO
Set the input channels of the SPI lines.
If option R&S RTH-B1 is installed, digital channels can also be used as source.
Polarity
Selects whether the chip select signal is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1).
Slope
Selects if data are sampled on the rising or falling slope of the clock. The clock slope
marks the begin of a new bit.
Thresholds / Technology
Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals. If the signal value is higher than the
threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, the signal state is considered low.
You can select the threshold voltages for various types of integrated circuits in the
"Technology" list, or set a user-defined value for each line in "Thresholds".
Word Length
Sets the number of bits in a word. The maximum length is 32 bit.
Bit Order
Defines if the data of the words starts with MSB (most significant bit) or LSB (least significant bit). The display of the decoded signal considers this setting, results are displayed in the specified order.
Frame Timeout
Sets the minimum idle time between two data frames. If the time interval between the
data frames is shorter, the words are part of the same frame. Within the timeout, the
data and clock lines are low. A new frame begins when the timeout has expired.
Timeout is only relevant if the bus has no chip select.
7.3.3 SPI Trigger Settings
Access: "Bus" menu > "Bus Protocol" = "SPI" > "Trigger"
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
128
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1)
SPI Trigger
Selects the trigger type for SPI analysis.
"Frame Start"
Sets the trigger to the start of the message. If the bus has a CS line,
the frame starts when the chip select signal changes to the active
state. Without CS line, the frame starts when the idle time has
expired.
"Frame End"
Sets the trigger to the end of the message. If the bus has a CS line,
the frame ends when the chip select signal changes to the inactive
state. Without CS line, the frame ends when the idle time has expired
after the last clock and no new clock appeared during that time.
"Data"
Sets the trigger to a specified bit pattern that is expected on one of
the lines.
Datasource
Selects the line, on which the trigger pattern is expected.
Pattern
Specifies the data pattern to be found on the specified line, in binary or hex format.
Enter the words in MSB first bit order.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
129
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)
Relation
Defines how the defined serial data pattern is compared with the acquired signal. The
instrument triggers if the acquired data word is equal or unequal the defined pattern.
Bit Offset
Sets the number of bits before the first bit of the pattern. These bits are ignored. The
first bit after CS or timeout is bit 0. For example, with bit offset = 2, bit 0 and bit 1 after
CS are ignored, and the pattern starts with bit 2.
Chip Select
Defines if the SPI bus uses a chip select line or not.
7.4 UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)
7.4.1 The UART Interface
The Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter UART converts words of data into
serial data, and vice versa. It is the base of many serial protocols like of RS-232 and
RS-422. The UART uses only one line, or two lines for transmitter and receiver. The
R&S RTH can analyze one UART line.
Data transfer
The data is transmitted in words, also referred to as symbols or characters. Each word
consists of a start bit, several data bits, an optional parity bit, and one or more stop
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
130
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)
bits. Several words can form a frame, or package. The end of a frame is marked by a
pause between two symbols.
Start
Data0 Data1 Data2 Data3 Data4 [Data5] [Data6] [Data7] [Data8] [Parity]
Stop
Figure 7-5: Bit order in a UART word (symbol)
●
The start bit is a logic 0.
●
The stop bits and the idle state are always logic 1.
The UART protocol has no clock for synchronization. The receiver synchronizes by
means of the start and stop bits, and the bit rate that must be known to the receiver.
Trigger
The R&S RTH can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals:
●
Start bit of a word
●
Frame start
●
Data pattern
●
Parity error
●
Stop error
●
Break
7.4.2 UART Configuration Settings
Access: "Bus" menu > "Bus Protocol" = "UART" > "Config"
Source
Selects the input channel to which the UART line is connected.
If option R&S RTH-B1 is installed, digital channels can also be used as source.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
131
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)
Remote command:
BUS:UART:SOURce on page 224
Polarity
Defines the logic states of the line. In idle high state, the idle state corresponds to a
logic 1, and the start bit to a logic 0. In idle low state, the idle state corresponds to a
logic 0, and the start bit to a logic 1. During idle time, no data is transmitted.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:POLarity on page 224
Threshold / Technology
Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals. If the signal value is higher than the
threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, the signal state is considered low. The
interpretation of high and low is defined by the Polarity.
You can select the threshold voltages for various types of integrated circuits in the
"Technology" list, or set a user-defined value in "Threshold".
Remote command:
BUS:UART:THReshold on page 224
Predefined Bit Rates / Bit Rate
Set the number of transmitted bits per second.
You can select a predefined value in the "Predefined Bit Rates" list, or set a userdefined value in "Bit Rate".
Remote command:
BUS:UART:STDBitrate on page 224
BUS:UART:BITRate on page 225
Data Bits
Sets the number of data bits in a word (symbol) in a range from 5 bits to 9 bits.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:SSIZe on page 225
Parity
Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection.
"None"
No parity bit is used.
"Odd"
The parity bit is set to "1" if the number of data bits set to "1" is even.
"Even"
The parity bit is set to "1" if the number of data bits set to "1" is odd.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:PARity on page 225
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits: 1 or 1.5 or 2 stop bits are possible.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:SBIT on page 225
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
132
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)
Bit Order
Defines if a word starts with MSB (most significant bit) or LSB (least significant bit).
The display of the decoded signal considers this setting, results are displayed in the
specified order.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:ORDer on page 226
Frame Mode
Allows to decode frames of several words in the data stream, which are defined by a
timeout between a stop bit and the next start bit. Enter the minimum timeout between
two frames in "Idle Time".
Remote command:
BUS:UART:FRAMemode on page 226
BUS:UART:TOUT on page 226
7.4.3 UART Trigger Settings
Access: "Bus" menu > "Bus Protocol" = "UART" > "Trigger"
UART Trigger
Selects the trigger type for UART analysis.
"Start Bit"
Triggers on a start bit. The start bit is the first low bit after a stop bit if
polarity is idle high.
"Frame Start"
Triggers on the begin of a data frame. The frame start is configured
with BUS:UART:FRAMemode.
"Data"
Triggers on a serial pattern or data word. You can define the Pattern
and Relation.
"Parity Error"
Triggers on a parity error, which indicates a transmission error. This
trigger type is only available if a parity is configured for the UART
bus.
"Stop Error"
Triggers if the stop bit is a logic 0.
"Break Condition"
Triggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit, and the data line
remains at logic 0 for longer than a UART word.
Pattern
Specifies the data pattern to be found on the specified trigger source, in binary or hex
format. Enter the words in MSB first bit order.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
133
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Protocol Analysis
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)
Relation
Defines how the defined serial data pattern is compared with the acquired signal. The
instrument triggers if the acquired data word is equal or unequal the defined pattern.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
134
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
Logic Analyzer Settings
8 Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
The Mixed Signal Option R&S RTH-B1 adds logic analyzer functions to the classical
oscilloscope functions. Using the logic analyzer, you can analyze and debug embedded systems with mixed-signal designs that use analog signals and time-correlated
digital signals simultaneously. The option provides a logic probe with 8 logic channels.
The instrument ensures that analog and digital waveforms are timealigned and
synchronized so that critical timing interactions between analog and digital signals can
be displayed and tested.
Each digital channel can be displayed on the screen and used as trigger source. Using
the pattern trigger, you can trigger on logical combinations of analog and digital channels. Additionally, you can define a trigger holdoff time.
► To activate or the logic analyzer, press the LOGIC key.
► To configure logic channels in the "Logic" menu, long-press the LOGIC key.
8.1 Logic Analyzer Settings
Access: "Logic" menu
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
135
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
Logic Analyzer Settings
Logic Channels
Enables or disables the logic channels.
Visible
By default, all 8 logic channels are displayed. Disable the logic channels that you do
not need for analysis.
Couple Thresh.
Couples the threshold and hysteresis settings for the logic channels.
If enabled, all logic channels use the same threshold and hysteresis settings.
If disabled, 2 channel groups are available, which can use different threshold and hysteresis settings: D0 - D3, and D4 - D7.
Remote command:
LOGic:THCoupling on page 226
Threshold
Sets the threshold value for the selected channel group, or for all logic channels. For
each acquired sample, the instrument compares the input voltage with the threshold
value. If the input voltage is above the threshold, the signal state "1" is stored. Otherwise, the signal state "0" is stored if the input voltage is below the threshold.
You can set the digital threshold in several ways:
● The same threshold and hysteresis are used for all logic channels: Enable "Threshold" and set the values for channels D0 - D3, and D4 - D7.
● Different thresholds and hysteresis are used for individual channel groups: Disable
"Threshold" and set the threshold and hysteresis for each group.
You can select the threshold voltages for various types of integrated circuits in the list,
or set a user-defined value.
"TTL"
1.4 V
"ECL"
-1.3 V
"CMOS"
2.5 V
"User"
Set the threshold value in "User Threshold Value".
Remote command:
LOGic:GROup<m>:TECHnology on page 227
LOGic:GROup<m>:USER on page 227
Hysteresis
Hysteresis avoids the change of signal states due to noise oscillation around the
threshold level. Set a small hysteresis for clean signals, and large hysteresis for noisy
signals.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
136
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
Logic Analyzer Settings
Threshold
Logic 0
Hysteresis
Logic 1
Logic 0
Remote command:
LOGic:GROup<m>:HYSTeresis on page 228
Deskew
Enables deskewing.
Deskew compensates delays that are known from the circuit specifics or caused by the
different length of cables. The skew between the probe boxes of the digital channels
and the probe connectors of the analog channels is automatically aligned by the instrument.
Select Channel / Deskew
You can set the deskew for all channels of a logic probe at once, or for each logic
channel separately.
Select the channel and enter the deskew value in "Deskew".
Set all Deskews to Zero
Resets all deskew values to zero.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
137
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Documenting Results
Instrument Settings
9 Documenting Results
The R&S RTH can store various data to files for further analysis and reporting:
●
Instrument Settings
●
Screenshots
●
Logger Records
9.1 Using USB Flash Drive
You can connect a USB flash drive on the right side of the instrument. If a USB flash
drive is connected, all screenshots and result data are written to this external device by
default. Instrument settings are usually saved on the instrument, but you can store
them to the USB flash drive as well.
1. To check the status of the USB flash drive, long-press the FILE key.
The connection status is shown on the top of the menu.
2. To check the the file system on the USB flash drive for errors, tap "Check USB
Drive".
3. To remove the USB flash drive from the instrument, tap "Eject USB Drive"
9.2 Instrument Settings
To repeat measurements or tests at different times or perform similar measurements
with different test data, you can save the used configuration settings for later use. Furthermore, it can be helpful to refer to the configuration settings of a particular measurement when analyzing the results. Therefore, you can easily save the complete measurement configuration including the display settings.
The R&S RTH provides two ways to store the measurement configuration:
●
Save as fast setting
●
Save as saveset
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
138
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Documenting Results
Instrument Settings
9.2.1 Using Fast Settings
The R&S RTH has 8 slots to save and load often used configuration settings very
quickly.
To save the current setting as fast setting
1. Press the SHIFT key.
2. Tap and hold one of the storage slots F1...F8.
The online keyboard opens.
3. Type the settings name and tap ↵.
The configuration settings are saved to the slot.
To load a fast setting
1. Press the SHIFT key.
2. Tap the storage slot that holds the required configuration.
The settings are loaded.
Alternatively, you can save and load fast settings in the "File" menu: FILE > "Settings"
> "Fast Settings".
9.2.2 Saving and Loading Savesets
You can save and reload an unlimited number of configuration setups. By default, the
settings are stored on the microSD card in the following directory:
media/SD/Rohde-Schwarz/RTH/SaveSets
The storage location can be changed. The file format is XML.
To save the current settings in a saveset
1. Press the FILE key.
2. Tap "Settings".
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
139
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Documenting Results
Instrument Settings
3. The current storage location is shown in "Setting Directory".
●
●
To store the file under a default name in the specified directory, tap "Save Setting".
To store the file in another directory and/or with a user-defined filename, tap
"Save Setting As". Select the path, directory, and enter the filename.
To load and display a saveset
1. Press the FILE key.
2. Tap "Settings".
3. The current storage location is shown in "Setting Directory".
●
●
To load a file from the specified directory, tap "Load Setting".
To load a file from another directory, tap "Setting Directory" and change the
directory.
Tap "Load Setting".
4. Select the file to be loaded.
Description of settings
Load Setting
Opens the specified directory. Tap the file to be loaded.
Save Setting
Saves the settings to the specified directory with a default filename. The filename pattern is: <filename base>_<date>_<time>.xml.
Save Setting As
Opens a file selection dialog. Navigate to the target directory and enter the filename.
Tap "Save" to store the file.
Setting Directory
Sets the directory to which the settings are stored with the "Save Setting" function.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
140
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Documenting Results
Screenshots
Filename Base
Defines the first part of the filename. The complete filename pattern is:
<filename base>_<date>_<time>.xml.
9.3 Screenshots
You can create and save sceenshots of the current display of your waveforms and
measurement results. If a USB flash device is connected to the R&S RTH, the instrument saves the screeenshot to the USB flash device. Otherwise, the screenshots are
saved on the microSD card.
► To save the current display in a screenshot, press the
► To configure the sceenshots, long-press the
menu.
key.
key, or open the "Screenshot"
You can also view all saved screenshots directly on the instrument.
9.3.1 Screenshot Settings
Access: "Screenshot" menu
New screenshot
Saves the current display in a new screenshot.
Remote command:
HCOPy:IMMediate on page 229
View screenshots
Displays the last saved screenshot. You can browse all screenshots that are saved.
Inverse
Inverts the colors of the output, i.e. a dark waveform is printed on a white background.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
141
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Documenting Results
Logger Records
Remote command:
HCOPy:INVerse on page 229
Black and White
Creates a black and white screenshot.
Remote command:
HCOPy:COLor on page 229
Filename base
Defines the prefix of the file name. By default, the filename has the prefix "Screenshot_".
Remote command:
MMEMory:NAME on page 229
File format
Defines the format of the screenshot file. The following formats are available:
●
●
●
●
PNG: Portable Network Graphics is a graphic format with lossless data compression.
JPG: compressed file format, compression according to to JPEG standard
BMP: BitMaP is an uncompressed format, files are large and saving might take
some time.
TIFF: Tagged Image File Format, often used in publishing companies and print
processing.
Remote command:
HCOPy:LANGuage on page 229
9.4 Logger Records
You can save the logger records to a CSV or MAT file for further analysis.
1. Press the FILE key.
2. Tap "Logger Records".
3. Tap "Export As".
4. Select the "File Type", enter the "File Name", and change the folder if necessary.
If a USB flash drive is attached, the file is stored there. Otherwise, the file is stored
in the Export folder on the microSD card.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
142
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Instrument Settings
10 General Instrument Setup
The general instrument settings are available in all operating modes.
Reset
To switch off the instrument and reset the hardware, press the
power key for 5 seconds. This is helpful if the instrument is in undefined condition and cannot be operated.
To restore the factory settings, hold down the PRESET key during the boot process.
Environment with high immissions
If you use the instrument in an environment with immissions considerably higher than
specified, the immisions may affect the touch sensitivity of the screen. In this case, disable the touch and operate the instrument using the keys and the wheel.
Use "Display" > "Enable Touch" to disable the touch.
10.1 Instrument Settings
Access:
or "Setup" menu
Selfalignment
See Chapter 10.2, "Selfalignment", on page 144.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
143
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Selfalignment
Selftest
The self-test checks the hardware of the instrument. It is intended for service tasks.
USB/LAN
See Chapter 11.1, "LAN Connection", on page 153 and Chapter 11.2, "USB connection", on page 155.
Wireless LAN
See Chapter 11.3, "Wireless LAN Connection (Option R&S RTH-K200)", on page 155.
Time and Date
See Chapter 10.3, "Setting the Date, Time and Language", on page 146.
User Interface Language
See Chapter 10.3, "Setting the Date, Time and Language", on page 146.
Options
See Chapter 10.4, "Options", on page 147
Maintenance
The "Device Info" tab provides service information for your R&S RTH. If you need support, you may be asked to provide this information. Here you can also read the Open
Source Acknowledgment, which provides verbatim license text of open source software that is used in the instrument's firmware.
The "Service" tab allows the service personnel to enter a password that activates further service functions.
Firmware Update
See Chapter 10.5, "Updating the Firmware", on page 150.
10.2 Selfalignment
Access:
or "Setup" menu > "Selfalignment"
The self-alignment aligns the data from several input channels vertically and horizontally to synchronize the timebases, amplitudes and positions.
The R&S RTH1002 provides an additional, separate self-alignment of the meter inputs.
Recommendation on performing the self-alignment:
●
When putting the instrument into operation for the first time
●
After a firmware update
●
Once a week
●
When major temperature changes occur (> 5°)
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
144
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Selfalignment
Warm-up and prepare the instrument
Make sure that the instrument has been running and warming up before you start the
self-alignment. The minimum warm-up time is indicated in the data sheet.
Before the self-alignment, remove all probes, leads, and other connected lines from the
instrument input.
Figure 10-1: Self-alignment in scope mode
► To start, tap "Start Selfalignment".
The alignment can take up to 15 minutes. The results are shown in the "Selfalignment" dialog box.
R&S RTH1002: Self-alignment of DMM inputs
If the instrument is in "Meter" mode, you can choose to align all inputs, or only the
meter inputs. The self-alignment of the meter inputs takes up to 30 seconds, while the
complete self-alignment takes up to 15 minutes.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
145
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Setting the Date, Time and Language
10.3 Setting the Date, Time and Language
The instrument has a date and time clock. You can adjust the clock to the local time,
and you can select the display language. Supported languages are listed in the data
sheet. The help is provided in English.
A reboot of the instrument is not necessary.
Set date and time
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
146
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Options
Set display language
Description of settings
User Interface Language
Select the language in which the functions and messages are displayed. Supported
languages are listed in the data sheet. The help is provided in English.
The instrument changes the language after a few seconds, a reboot is not required.
Time
Set the local time in the following order: hours / minutes / seconds.
Remote command:
SYSTem:TIME on page 230
Date
Set the date in the following order: year / month / day.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DATE on page 230
10.4 Options
All options are activated by license keys. No additional installation or hardware change
is required.
Unregistered licenses
Unregistered licenses are not assigned to a particular instrument. The instrument
accepts only registered licenses. If your license is delivered unregistered, use the
online tool R&S License Manager to register the license for your instrument. The registration of a permanent license is irreversible, so ensure that you register it for the correct instrument. The address of the tool is https://extranet.rohde-schwarz.com/service.
The "Active options" tab provides information on installed software options. Here you
can install new options or deactivate existing options using license keys.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
147
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Options
The "Inactive options" tab lists all deactivated and expired options.
The "Deactivated options" tab shows all deactivated options with their deactivation
information and provides a function to export the deactivation response. The response
is required by the R&S License Manager.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
148
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Options
10.4.1 Activating Options
Consult your sales representative and provide the material number, serial number, and
the device ID of your instrument to get a license key. You find this information in
>
"Options" > "Active options".
The license key is provided in written form or in a file. Unregistered licenses must be
registered in the R&S License Manager before they can be activated on the instrument.
1. If you received the option key in a file, save the file to a USB flash drive, and connect the drive to the R&S RTH.
2. Press the
key.
3. Select "Options", and select the "Active options" tab.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
149
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Updating the Firmware
4. If you received a key in written form, enter the key in the "Enter new option key"
field.
If you received a key in digital form as a file, tap "Install from file", select path /
media/USB1, and select the option key file.
5. If you want to activate several options, repeat step 3 for each option.
6. Restart the instrument.
10.5 Updating the Firmware
Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version. Firmware updates are
provided on the Internet at www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/rth.html > "Downloads" >
"Firmware". Along with the firmware file, you find the Release Notes describing the
improvements and modifications.
Make sure to update the firmware if a new version is available.
1. Download the firmware installation file RTH*.rsi, and save it to a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector on the right panel of the instrument.
3. Press
.
4. Scroll down the menu and tap "Open File" under "Firmware Update".
5. Select the firmware file.
If you cannot see the RTH*.rsi file, select the path /media/USB1, and the folder
that contains the file.
6. Tap "Select".
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
150
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Display Settings
7. Tap "Yes".
The firmware update starts. Wait until the update has finished. The instrument
restarts automatically.
10.6 Display Settings
Access: "Display" menu
Contrast Mode
If enabled, the waveforms are displayed in black color on white background.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CONTrast on page 231
Enable Touch
Switches the touch functionality of the screen on or off.
If you use the instrument in an environment with immissions considerably higher than
specified, the immisions may affect the touch sensitivity of the screen. In this case, disable the touch and operate the instrument using the keys and the wheel.
Persistence Type
Defines how long every new data point remains on the screen.
"Off"
Deactivates persistence.
"Time"
Data points remain on the screen for the duration defined with Persistence Time.
"Infinite"
Data points remain on the screen infinitely until persistence is set to
"Off".
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
151
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
General Instrument Setup
Display Settings
Remote command:
DISPlay:PERSistence[:TYPE] on page 230
Persistence Time
User-defined persistence time if "Persistence Type" is "Time". Each new data point
remains on the screen for the duration defined here.
Remote command:
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME on page 231
Grid Mode
Defines the grid display. A grid helps you identify the position of specific data points.
"Off"
No grid is shown.
"Dots"
Dots mark the intersections of the gridlines.
"Lines"
Displays the grid as horizontal and vertical lines.
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the touchscreen.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:LCD:BRIGthness on page 231
Show Probe Settings
Defines how long the probe settings of active channels are shown when you press a
channel key. The settings are shown on the top of the display.
The probe settings are always shown as long as the "Vertical" menu is open.
Display Off After
Defines when the display switches off if it is not used. Switching off the display saves
energy and prolongs the battery's operating time.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
152
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Network Connections
LAN Connection
11 Network Connections
This chapter describes the setup of network connections.
There are several ways to connect the R&S RTH to a computer:
●
Connect the instrument to a local area network (LAN), usually the company network. For this connection, ethernet technology is used.
LAN connection is used for remote operation using the web interface option
R&S RTH-K201, for remote control using SCPI commands, and for data transfer.
●
Connect the instrument directly to a computer using USB.
The direct USB connection is used for remote control using SCPI commands.
●
Connect the instrument to the wireless LAN (requires option R&S RTH-K200).
You can operate the instrument remotely using a web browser on the computer or
mobile device.
11.1 LAN Connection
1. Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector on the right panel of the instrument.
2. Press the
key.
3. Select "USB/LAN".
4. Select "Interface" = "Ethernet". By default, DHCP is used and all address information is assigned automatically.
5. Note the IP address, which is required to address the instrument in the network.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
153
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Network Connections
LAN Connection
Description of settings
Interface
Select LAN or USB connection.
Status
Shows the connection status.
Hostname
Shows the computer name of the instrument.
In a LAN that uses a Domain Name System server (DNS server), each computer or
instrument can be accessed using a unique name instead of the IP address. The DNS
server translates the host name to the IP address. The host name is useful when a
DHCP server is used, as a new IP address is assigned each time the instrument is
restarted.
The default name is RTH-<serial_number>. You can change the name, but make sure
that the name is unique in the LAN.
DHCP
Enables dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). If DHCP is on, all address information is assigned automatically. Disable
DHCP if the network does not support this protocol.
IP Address / Subnet mask / Gateway / DNS Server
Shows the IP address and other address information for LAN connection.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
154
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Network Connections
Wireless LAN Connection (Option R&S RTH-K200)
If the network supports DHCP, the DHCP server assigns these parameters. It is safe to
establish a connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
If DHCP is not supported, enter the address information manually (static address).
Note: Risk of network errors. Connection errors can affect the entire network. If your
network does not support DHCP, or if you disable DHCP, make sure to assign valid
address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN. To obtain a valid IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway, contact your network administrator.
MAC Address
Shows the media access control address (MAC address), a physical address and a
unique identifier of the instrument.
11.2 USB connection
The USB device connector is intended to connect a computer directly to the instrument. You need a VISA communication tool installed on the computer to control the
instrument using remote commands.
1. Connect a USB cable to the USB mini-B connector on the right panel of the instrument, and to a computer.
2. Press the
key.
3. Select "USB/LAN".
4. Select "Interface" = "USB".
The instrument shows the connection status.
5. When the computer detects the connected instrument, the drivers are automatically
installed, and a message is displayed.
The drivers are IVI drivers
6. Open the Device Manager on the computer and check if the connected instrument
is shown.
11.3 Wireless LAN Connection (Option R&S RTH-K200)
Using the option R&S RTH-K200 , you can connect your instrument to portable devices. When connected, the waveform display and user interface of the R&S RTH are
directly available in the web browser. All settings can be changed in the browser, no
software installation is required.
There are two ways to connect via wireless LAN:
●
Usually, the R&S RTH is the access point and you set up connection on the portable device.
●
The R&S RTH is the client that connects to a router or access point.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
155
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Network Connections
Wireless LAN Connection (Option R&S RTH-K200)
To enable wireless LAN
1. Press the
key.
2. Tap "Wireless LAN".
3. Only for option R&S RTH-K200: Select the country, where you use the instrument.
The list contains all countries where the wireless LAN option has been approved.
You also can find the list in the data sheet.
4. Enable "Wireless State".
Now you can connect the instrument.
To use the instrument as access point
1. Select "Wireless Mode" = "Access Point" in the "Wireless LAN" menu.
2. If you connect for the first time, change the default "Passphrase". You can also
change the identifier of the instrument, the "SSID".
3. On your portable device, set up the connection to the instrument. Select the SSID
and enter the passphrase.
The detailed procedure is described in the documentation of your portable device.
To use the instrument as client
1. Select "Wireless Mode" = "Client" in the "Wireless LAN" menu.
2. Tap "Scan" for available wireless LAN routers and access points.
3. Select the "Network SSID" of the required router.
4. Enter the password of the required router in "Network Passphrase".
If the connection succeeded, "Connected" is enabled.
Alternatively, you can enter the DHCP or static IP address of the router to identify
it.
Description of settings
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
156
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Network Connections
Web Interface (Option R&S RTH-K201)
Wireless State
Enables or disables wireless LAN access.
Wireless Mode
Selects the wireless LAN function of the instrument. It can serve as access point or as
client.
SSID
Shows the wireless LAN identifier of the instrument. You can change the identifier.
Passphrase
Shows the wireless LAN password of the instrument. You can change the password.
Status / Connected
Shows the connection status.
Network SSID
Enter the SSID of the router to which you want to connect.
Network Passphrase
Enter the password of the router to which you want to connect.
Scan
Checks for available routers and access points.
MAC Address
Shows the media access control address (MAC address), a physical address and
unique identifier of the instrument.
11.4 Web Interface (Option R&S RTH-K201)
If the R&S RTH is connected to a computer via LAN or WLAN, you can operate the
instrument from the computer. No additional tools are required, you need only a web
browser that supports HTML5. Thus, you can use your smartphone or tablet to operate
the oscilloscope remotely.
1. Open a web browser on the computer or mobile device.
2. Type the instrument's host name or IP address in the address field of the browser,
for example, http://10.133.10.203.
The instrument's homepage is shown.
Using the web interface, you can:
●
Display a screenshot of the current instrument display.
●
Operate the instrument using the menus on the emulated display.
This view is designed for small devices, for example, smartphones.
●
Operate the instrument using the emulated front panel.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
157
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Network Connections
Web Interface (Option R&S RTH-K201)
You see a live image of the instrument. You can use the keys, the wheel and the
menus in the same way as directly on the instrument.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
158
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Mode
12 Remote Control Commands
12.1 Conventions used in Command Description
Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions:
●
Command usage
If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying
parameters.
If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the
usage is stated explicitly.
●
Parameter usage
If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the
result of a query.
Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters.
Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters.
Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return
values.
●
Conformity
Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI confirmed. All commands used by the R&S RTH follow the SCPI syntax rules.
●
Asynchronous commands
A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous
command.
●
Reset values (*RST)
Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST
command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.
●
Default unit
This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parameter.
12.2 Mode
OP[:MODE] <OperationMode>
Sets the operating mode of the instrument.
Parameters:
<OperationMode>
YT | XY | MASK | METer | LOGGer
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
YT
159
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
12.3 Waveform Setup
●
●
●
●
●
Automatic Setup....................................................................................................160
Vertical Setup........................................................................................................160
Horizontal Setup....................................................................................................164
Acquisition Control................................................................................................ 166
Trigger...................................................................................................................168
12.3.1 Automatic Setup
AUToscale
Performs an autoset in scope mode.
Usage:
Event
12.3.2 Vertical Setup
The channel suffix <m> selects the channel for which the command is executed. The
number of channels depends on the instrument type. The R&S RTH1004 has 4 channels, the suffix values are 1 | 2 | 3 | 4. The R&S RTH1002 has 2 channels, the suffix
values are 1 | 2.
Make sure to set the attenuation factor on the instrument according to the probe being
used. Otherwise, the measurement results do not reflect the actual voltage level, and
you might misjudge the actual risk.
CHANnel<m>:STATe..................................................................................................... 160
CHANnel<m>:SCALe..................................................................................................... 161
CHANnel<m>:RANGe.................................................................................................... 161
CHANnel<m>:PROBe.................................................................................................... 161
CHANnel<m>:POLarity...................................................................................................162
CHANnel<m>:POSition...................................................................................................162
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet.................................................................................................... 163
CHANnel<m>:COUPling................................................................................................. 163
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth...............................................................................................163
CHANnel<m>:DESKew.................................................................................................. 164
CHANnel<m>:STATe <State>
Switches the channel signal on or off.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
OFF
160
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
CHANnel<m>:SCALe <Scale>
Sets the vertical scale (vertical sensitivity) of the indicated waveform.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<Scale>
Scale value, given in Volts per division
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
2E-3 to 100
1E-3
0.05
V/div
CHANnel<m>:RANGe <Range>
Sets the voltage range across the 8 vertical divisions of the diagram. Use the command alternatively to CHANnel<m>:SCALe.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<Range>
Voltage range value
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 800E+3
10E-6
0
V
CHANnel<m>:PROBe <ProbeSettings>
Sets the attenuation factor of the connected probe. The vertical scaling and measured
values are multiplied by this factor so that the displayed values are equal to the actual
signal values.
Make sure to set the attenuation factor on the instrument according to the probe being
used. Otherwise, the measurement results do not reflect the actual voltage level, and
you might misjudge the actual risk.
Suffix:
<m>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
161
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<ProbeSettings>
V1TO1 | V10To1 | V20To1 | V100to1 | V200to1 | V1000to1 |
C100V1A | C10V1A | C1V1A | C100MV1A | C10MV1A |
C1MV1A | T1MVC | T1MVF | PT100 | PT500 | PT1000
V1TO1 | V10To1 | V20To1 | V100To1 | V200To1 | V1000To1
Attenuation factors of voltage probes: 1:1, 10:1, 20:1, 100:1,
200:1, 1000:1.
C100V1A | C10V1A | C1V1A | C100MV1A | C10MV1A |
C1MV1A
Sensitivity of current probes: 100 V/A, 10 V/A, 1 V/A, 100 mV/A,
10 mV/A, 1 mV/A.
T1MVC | T1MVF | TPTC | TPTF
Temperature adapter type: 1 mV/°C, 1 mV/°F, PT100(°C),
PT100(°F)
*RST:
V1TO1
CHANnel<m>:POLarity <Polarity>
Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off. To invert means to reflect the voltage values of all signal components against the ground level. Inversion affects only the
display of the signal but not the trigger.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
*RST:
NORMal
CHANnel<m>:POSition <Position>
Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram. The position is a graphical setting given in divisions, while the offset sets a voltage.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<Position>
Position value, given in divisions.
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
-4 to 4
0.5
0
div
162
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets an offset voltage that is added to correct an offset-affected signal. The value is
included in measurement results. The signal is shifted in relation to the ground level by
the offset value. Negative offset values move the waveform down, positive values
move it up.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Offset>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-400 to 400
0.5
0
V
CHANnel<m>:COUPling <Coupling>
Selects the connection of the indicated channel.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<Coupling>
DCLimit | ACLimit
DCLimit
The signal passes the input unchanged.
ACLimit
A high-pass filter removes the DC offset voltage from the input
signal if the DC component of a signal is of no interest.
*RST:
DCLimit
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth <BandwidthLimit>
Selects the bandwidth limit for the indicated channel.
Suffix:
<m>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
163
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<BandwidthLimit>
FULL | B350 | B200 | B100 | B60 | B50 | B40 | B20 | B10 | B5 |
B4 | B2 | B1 | B5HK | B4HK | B2HK | B1HK | B50K | B40K |
B20K | B10K | B5K | B4K | B2K | B1K
FULL
At full bandwidth, all frequencies in the specified range are
acquired and displayed.
B350 | B200 | B100 | B60 | B50 | B40 | B20 | B10 | B5 | B4 | B2
| B1
Limit to 350 MHz, 200 MHz, 100 MHz, 60 MHz,..., respectively.
B5HK | B4HK | B2HK | B1HK | B50K | B40K | B20K | B10K |
B5K | B4K | B2K | B1K
Limit to 500 kHz, 400 kHz,..., respectively.
*RST:
FULL
CHANnel<m>:DESKew <Deskew>
Sets a delay for the selected channel.
Deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the different
length of cables, probes, and other sources.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2 (RTH1002) , 1..4 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<Deskew>
Deskew value
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E-9 to 100E-9
800E-12
0
s
12.3.3 Horizontal Setup
TIMebase:SCALe...........................................................................................................164
TIMebase:RANGe..........................................................................................................165
TIMebase:HORizontal:POSition.......................................................................................165
TIMebase:REFerence.....................................................................................................165
ACQuire:POINts:ARATe?............................................................................................... 165
TIMebase:SCALe <Scale>
Sets the time scale of the horizontal axis for all signals.
Parameters:
<Scale>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E-9 to 500
Steps 1, 2, 5 (1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500...)
100E-9
s/div
164
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TIMebase:RANGe <AcquisitionTime>
Sets the acquisition time, the timerange across the 10 horizontal divisions of the diagram. Use the command alternatively to TIMebase:SCALe.
Parameters:
<AcquisitionTime>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
10E-9 to 5000
Steps 1, 2, 5 (1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500...)
1E-6
s
TIMebase:HORizontal:POSition <Position>
Sets the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point.
See also: "Horizontal Position" on page 44
Parameters:
<Position>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Depends on the time scale, see table below.
0.1
0
s
Time scale
Min./max. horizontal position
1 ns/div to 100 µs/div
±2 s
200 µs/div to 2 s/div
Time scale * 20000
5 s/div – 500 s/div
100000 s
TIMebase:REFerence <ReferencePoint>
Defines the time reference point in the diagram.
Parameters:
<ReferencePoint>
Position of the reference point in percent of the screen width.
Available values are:
10: on the left side of the screen
50: in the middle of the screen
90: on the right side
*RST:
50
Default unit: %
ACQuire:POINts:ARATe?
Returns the number of recorded analog waveform points per second.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
165
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Return values:
<ADCSampleRate>
Usage:
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1.25E+9 to 5E+9
1
1.25E+9
Sa/s
Query only
12.3.4 Acquisition Control
RUN............................................................................................................................. 166
STOP........................................................................................................................... 166
ACQuire:MODE............................................................................................................. 166
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt............................................................................................. 167
ACQuire:ARESet:IMMediate........................................................................................... 167
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]?.............................................................................................. 167
ACQuire:RESolution?.....................................................................................................168
RUN
Starts the continuous acquisition.
Usage:
Event
STOP
Stops the running acquistion.
Usage:
Event
ACQuire:MODE <AcquisitionMode>
Defines how the waveform is built from the captured samples.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
166
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<AcquisitionMode>
SAMPle | PDETect | HRESolution | AVERage | ENVelope
SAMPle
One of n samples in a sample interval is recorded as waveform
point, the other samples are discarded.
PDETect
The minimum and the maximum of n samples are recorded as
waveform points, the other samples are discarded.
HRESolution
The average of n captured sample points is recorded as one
waveform point.
AVERage
The average is calculated from the data of the current acquisition and a number of acquisitions before. The number of acquisitions for average calculation is defined with ACQuire:
AVERage:COUNt.
ENVelope
The minimum and maximum values in an sample interval over a
number of acquisitions are saved. The most extreme values of
all acquisitions build the envelope.
*RST:
SAMPle
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt <NoOfAvgs>
Sets the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform.
Parameters:
<NoOfAvgs>
Range:
2 to 8192
Increment: 2N (N = 1 .. 13)
*RST:
2
ACQuire:ARESet:IMMediate
Restarts the envelope and average calculation.
Usage:
Event
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]?
Returns the record length, number of recorded waveform samples.
Return values:
<RecordLength>
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Range:
1 to 500000
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
Query only
167
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
ACQuire:RESolution?
Returns the resolution, the time between two waveform samples.
Return values:
<ResolutionPP>
Usage:
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E-12 to 1E+12
1E-12
0
s
Query only
12.3.5 Trigger
12.3.5.1
General Trigger Settings
See also: Chapter 2.5.1, "General Trigger Settings", on page 47
TRIGger:MODE............................................................................................................. 168
TRIGger:SOURce.......................................................................................................... 169
TRIGger:TYPE.............................................................................................................. 169
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:VALue............................................................................................. 169
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MODE................................................................................................169
TRIGger:HOLDoff:TIME..................................................................................................170
TRIGger:HOLDoff:EVENts.............................................................................................. 170
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MIN................................................................................................... 170
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MAX.................................................................................................. 170
TRIGger:MNR................................................................................................................171
TRIGger:MODE <Mode>
The trigger mode determines the behavior of the instrument if no trigger occurs, and
also the number of acquired waveforms when a trigger occurs.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | NORMal | SINGle | AS
AUTO
The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger conditions are not fulfilled. If a real trigger occurs, it takes
precedence.
NORMal
The instrument acquires waveforms continuously, each time
when a trigger occurs.
SINGle
When a trigger occurs, the instrument acquires one waveform.
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
AUTO
168
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger source, the waveform on which the trigger condition is checked.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
Logic channels D0..D7 require option R&S RTH-B1. For video,
runt, slew rate and window trigger, only analog channels are
available.
*RST:
C1
TRIGger:TYPE <Type>
Selects the trigger type, the event type that defines the trigger point.
Parameters:
<Type>
EDGE | GLITch | WIDTh | TV | PATTern | STATe | RUNT |
SLEWrate | DATatoclock | SERPattern | TIMeout | INTerval |
WINDow | PROTocol
EDGE | GLITch | WIDTh | TV
Standard trigger types
PATTern | STATe | RUNT | SLEWrate | DATatoclock | SERPattern | TIMeout | INTerval | WINDow
Require option R&S RTH-K19
PROTocol
Requires option R&S RTH-K1 and/or R&S RTH-K2
*RST:
EDGE
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:VALue <Level>
Sets the trigger treshold voltage. The command is relevant for all trigger types that
require one trigger level.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Level>
.
1..22
Indicates the trigger source:
1..4: analog channel 1 to 4
8..15: digital channels D0 to D7
5..7 and 16..22: not available
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-10 to 10
1E-3
0
V
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MODE <Mode>
Selects the method to define the holdoff.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
169
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<Mode>
OFF | TIME | RANDom | EVENts
OFF
No holdoff
TIME
Defines the holdoff as a time period. The next trigger occurs only
after a time has passed, which is defined with TRIGger:
HOLDoff:TIME.
RANDom
Defines the holdoff as a random time limited by TRIGger:
HOLDoff:MIN and TRIGger:HOLDoff:MAX. For each acquisition, the instrument selects a new random holdoff time from the
specified range.
EVENts
Defines the holdoff as a number of trigger events, which is
defined with TRIGger:HOLDoff:EVENts.
*RST:
OFF
TRIGger:HOLDoff:TIME <Time>
Sets the time that has to pass at least until the next trigger occurs. The command
takes effect if TRIGger:MODE is set to TIME.
Parameters:
<Time>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
8E-9 to 10
200E-6
1E-3
s
TRIGger:HOLDoff:EVENts <Events>
Sets the number of triggers to be skipped until the next trigger occurs. The command
takes effect if TRIGger:MODE is set to EVENts.
Parameters:
<Events>
Range:
1 to 1000000000
Increment: 10
*RST:
1
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MIN <RandomMinTime>
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MAX <RandomMaxTime>
Set the time limits for random holdoff time. For each acquisition, the instrument selects
a new random holdoff time from the specified range.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
170
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<RandomMinTime> Range:
<RandomMaxTime> Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
8E-9 to 10
200E-6
2E-3
s
TRIGger:MNR <MoreNoiseReject>
Enables a hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation
around the trigger level.
Parameters:
<MoreNoiseReject>
ON | OFF
*RST:
12.3.5.2
OFF
Edge Trigger
TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the edge direction for the trigger. You can trigger on:
●
Rising edge, that is a positive voltage change
●
Falling edge, that is a negative voltage change
●
Rising and falling edge
Parameters:
<Slope>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
12.3.5.3
POSitive
Glitch Trigger
See also: Chapter 2.5.3, "Glitch Trigger", on page 51
TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity...............................................................................................171
TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe................................................................................................ 172
TRIGger:GLITch:WIDTh................................................................................................. 172
TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the pulse polarity, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. You can trigger on:
●
Positive going pulses. The width is defined from the rising to the falling edge.
●
Negative going pulses. The width is defined from the falling to the rising edge.
●
Both positive and negative going pulses
Parameters:
<Polarity>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
POSitive
171
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe <Condition>
Selects the glitches to be identified: shorter or longer than the width specified with
TRIGger:GLITch:WIDTh.
Parameters:
<Condition>
LONGer | SHORter
*RST:
LONGer
TRIGger:GLITch:WIDTh <Duration>
Sets the pulse width of the glitch.
Parameters:
<Duration>
12.3.5.4
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
Width Trigger
See also Chapter 2.5.4, "Width Trigger", on page 52.
TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity............................................................................................... 172
TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe.................................................................................................172
TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh..................................................................................................173
TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa..................................................................................................173
TRIGger:WIDTh:MAX..................................................................................................... 173
TRIGger:WIDTh:MIN...................................................................................................... 174
TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the pulse polarity, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. You can trigger on:
●
Positive going pulses. The width is defined from the rising to the falling edge.
●
Negative going pulses. The width is defined from the falling to the rising edge.
●
Both positive and negative going pulses
Parameters:
<Polarity>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
POSitive
TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe <Condition>
Defines how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit(s).
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
172
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<Condition>
LONGer | SHORter | EQUal | NEQual | WITHin | OUTSide
LONGer | SHORter
Triggers on pulses shorter or longer than a width set using
TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh.
EQUal | NEQual
Triggers on pulses equal or not equal a given width that is set
using TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh. In addition, a tolerance can be
set around the specified width using TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa.
WITHin | OUTSide
Triggers on pulses inside or outside a given range. The range is
set using TRIGger:WIDTh:MIN and TRIGger:WIDTh:MAX.
*RST:
LONGer
TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh <Duration>
Sets the width for comparison ranges EQUal, UNEQual, SHORter, and LONGer.
See TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe on page 172
Parameters:
<Duration>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa <Tolerance>
Sets a range Δt to the specified width, which is defined using TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh
.
Parameters:
<Tolerance>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 5000
500E-12
0
s
TRIGger:WIDTh:MAX <MaxDuration>
Sets the upper limit for the pulse width if TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe is set to WITHin or
OUTSide.
Parameters:
<MaxDuration>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
173
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:WIDTh:MIN <MinDuration>
Sets the lower limit for the pulse width if TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe is set to WITHin or
OUTSide.
Parameters:
<MinDuration>
12.3.5.5
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
Pattern Trigger
See also Chapter 2.5.6, "Pattern Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)", on page 57.
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe[:CHANnel<1..22>]....................................................................174
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe:COMBination...........................................................................174
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe................................................................................... 175
TRIGger:PATTern:TIMeout[:TIME]...................................................................................175
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh].................................................................................. 175
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa.................................................................................... 176
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe[:CHANnel<1..22>] <State>
Sets the state of each input channel. The channel is specified by the channel suffix:
1..4: analog channel 1 to 4
8..15: digital channels D0 to D7
5..7 and 16..22: not available
The logical combination of the channel states is defined by TRIGger:PATTern:
STATe:COMBination.
Parameters:
<State>
ONE | ZERO | DONTcare
ONE
The signal value is above the defined threshold.
ZERO
The signal value is below the defined threshold.
DONTcare
The signal state does not matter.
*RST:
DONTcare
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe:COMBination <ChCombination>
Sets the logical combination for all active channels. The required state of each channel
is defined by TRIGger:STATe:CHANnel<1..22>.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
174
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<ChCombination>
AND | OR
*RST:
AND
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe <Condition>
Adds additional time limitation to the pattern defined by TRIGger:PATTern:STATe[:
CHANnel<1..22>] and TRIGger:PATTern:STATe:COMBination.
Parameters:
<Condition>
ANY | TIMeout | LONGer | SHORter | EQUal | NEQual |
WITHin | OUTSide
ANY
Triggers on all runts fulfilling the level condition, without time limitation.
Triggers if the signals match the pattern definition for a minimum
time, which is specified by TRIGger:PATTern:TIMeout[:
TIME].
LONGer | SHORter
Triggers on pulses shorter or longer than a runt width that is
defined by TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh.
EQUal | NEQual
Triggers pulses with a width equal or unequal to a given width
and an optional tolerance defined by TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh
and Runt Width
WITHin | OUTSide
Triggers on pulses inside or outside a given range. The range is
defined by ..
*RST:
LONGer
TRIGger:PATTern:TIMeout[:TIME] <Time>
Sets a minimum time during which the signals match the pattern definition defined by
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe[:CHANnel<1..22>] and TRIGger:PATTern:STATe:
COMBination.
The command is required if TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe is set to TIMeout.
Parameters:
<Time>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
100E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] <Duration>
Sets the width for comparison ranges LONGer, SHORter, EQUal and NEQual.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
175
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
See TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe on page 175.
Parameters:
<Duration>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa <Tolerance>
Sets a range Δt to the pattern width that is defined by TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:
WIDTh].
Parameters:
<Tolerance>
12.3.5.6
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 5000
500E-12
0
s
State Trigger
See also Chapter 2.5.7, "State Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)", on page 59.
TRIGger:STATe:CHANnel<1..22>................................................................................... 176
TRIGger:STATe:COMBination.........................................................................................177
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce[:VALue].................................................................................. 177
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce:EDGE.....................................................................................177
TRIGger:STATe:CHANnel<1..22> <State>
Sets the state of each input channel. The channel is specified by the channel suffix:
1..4: analog channel 1 to 4
8..15: digital channels D0 to D7
5..7 and 16..22: not available
The logical combination of the channel states is defined by TRIGger:STATe:
COMBination.
Parameters:
<State>
ONE | ZERO | DONTcare
ONE
The signal value is above the defined threshold.
ZERO
The signal value is below the defined threshold.
DONTcare
The signal state does not matter.
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
DONTcare
176
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:STATe:COMBination <ChCombination>
Sets the logical combination for all active channels. The required state of each channel
is defined by TRIGger:PATTern:STATe[:CHANnel<1..22>].
Parameters:
<ChCombination>
AND | OR
*RST:
AND
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce[:VALue] <Source>
Sets the input channel of the clock signal.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
*RST:
C1
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce:EDGE <Slope>
Sets the edge of the clock at which the instrument checks the signal states.
Parameters:
<Slope>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
12.3.5.7
POSitive
Runt Trigger
See also Chapter 2.5.8, "Runt Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)", on page 60.
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:LOWer...................................................................................177
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:UPPer................................................................................... 177
TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity................................................................................................ 178
TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe..................................................................................................178
TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh................................................................................................... 178
TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa................................................................................................... 178
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:LOWer <LowerLevel>
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:UPPer <UpperLevel>
Set the upper and lower levels that limit the runt.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<LowerLevel>
<UpperLevel>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
1..22
1..4: Indicates the trigger source: analog channel 1 to 4
5..22: not available
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-10 to 10
1E-3
0
V
177
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the pulse polarity, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. You can trigger on:
●
Positive going pulses. The width is defined from the rising to the falling edge.
●
Negative going pulses. The width is defined from the falling to the rising edge.
●
Both positive and negative going pulses
Parameters:
<Polarity>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
POSitive
TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe <Condition>
Defines an additional time limit of the runt pulse.
Parameters:
<Condition>
ANY | LONGer | SHORter | EQUal | NEQual | WITHin | OUTSide
ANY
Triggers on all runts fulfilling the level condition, without time limitation.
LONGer | SHORter
Defines a minimum time during which the signals match the pattern definition. The minimum time is defined by
EQUal | NEQual
Triggers on pulses equal or not equal a given runt width that is
set using TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh. In addition, a tolerance can
be set around the specified width using TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa
.
WITHin | OUTSide
Triggers on pulses inside or outside a given range. The range is
set using ... and ....
*RST:
LONGer
TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh <Duration>
Sets the width for comparison ranges EQUal, UNEQual, SHORter, and LONGer.
See TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe.
Parameters:
<Duration>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa <Tolerance>
Sets a range Δt to the specified width, which is defined using TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
178
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<Tolerance>
12.3.5.8
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 5000
500E-12
0
s
Slew Rate Trigger
See also Chapter 2.5.9, "Slew Rate Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)", on page 62.
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:LOWer...................................................................................179
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:UPPer................................................................................... 179
TRIGger:SLEW:SLOPe.................................................................................................. 179
TRIGger:SLEW:RANGe..................................................................................................179
TRIGger:SLEW:RATE.................................................................................................... 180
TRIGger:SLEW:DELTa...................................................................................................180
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:LOWer <Level>
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:UPPer <Level>
Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds, respectively. The time measurement starts
when the signal crosses the first trigger level - the upper or lower level depending on
the selected slope - and stops when the signal crosses the second level.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Level>
.
1..22
1..4: Indicates the trigger source: analog channel 1 to 4
5..22: not available
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-10 to 10
1E-3
0
V
TRIGger:SLEW:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the edge direction for the trigger.
Parameters:
<Slope>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
POSitive
TRIGger:SLEW:RANGe <Condition>
Defines the time limits of the slew rate.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
179
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<Condition>
LONGer | SHORter | EQUal | NEQual | WITHin | OUTSide
LONGer | SHORter
Triggers on pulses shorter or longer than a runt width that is set
using TRIGger:SLEW:RATE.
EQUal | NEQual
Triggers on pulses equal or not equal a given runt width that is
set using TRIGger:SLEW:RATE. In addition, a tolerance can be
set around the specified width using TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa.
WITHin | OUTSide
Triggers on pulses inside or outside a given range. The range is
set using ... and ....
*RST:
LONGer
TRIGger:SLEW:RATE <Duration>
Sets the slew rate for comparison ranges EQUal, UNEQual, SHORter, and LONGer.
See TRIGger:SLEW:RANGe.
Parameters:
<Duration>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
TRIGger:SLEW:DELTa <Tolerance>
Sets a range Δt to the specified slew rate, which is defined using TRIGger:SLEW:
RATE.
Parameters:
<Tolerance>
12.3.5.9
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 5000
500E-12
0
s
Data2Clock Trigger
See also Chapter 2.5.10, "Data2Clock Trigger (R&S RTH-K19)", on page 64.
TRIGger:DATatoclock:DSOurce[:VALue].......................................................................... 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce[:VALue].......................................................................... 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce:EDGE............................................................................ 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CONDition.................................................................................... 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe.......................................................................................... 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe.......................................................................................... 182
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
180
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:DATatoclock:DSOurce[:VALue] <Source>
Selects the input channel of the data signal.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
*RST:
C1
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce[:VALue] <Source>
Selects the input channel of the clock signal.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
*RST:
C1
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce:EDGE <Slope>
Sets the edge of the clock signal: rising (POSitive), falling (NEGative), or both
edges (EITHer). The time reference point for the setup and hold time is the crossing
point of the clock edge and the trigger level.
Parameters:
<Slope>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
POSitive
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CONDition <TrigCondition>
Selects how a violation of the setup and hold time is handled.
Parameters:
<TrigCondition>
VIOLation | OK
VIOLation
Triggers on a violation of the setup or hold time
OK
Triggers if setup and hold time keep the limits.
*RST:
VIOLation
TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe <HoldTime>
Sets the minimum time after the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady.
The hold time can be negative. In this case, the setup time has to be positive. The
setup time is defined by TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
181
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<HoldTime>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-124E-9 to 124E-9
1E-9
1E-9
s
TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe <SetupTime>
Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady.
The setup time can be negative. In this case, the hold time has to be positive. The
setup time is defined by TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe.
Parameters:
<SetupTime>
12.3.5.10
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-124E-9 to 124E-9
1E-9
1E-9
s
Serial Pattern Trigger
TRIGger:SPATtern:DSOurce[:VALue].............................................................................. 182
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue].............................................................................. 182
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:EDGE.................................................................................182
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:FIRStedge.......................................................................... 183
TRIGger:SPATtern:ORDer..............................................................................................183
TRIGger:SPATtern:PATTern........................................................................................... 183
TRIGger:SPATtern:DSOurce[:VALue] <Source>
Selects the input channel of the data signal.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
*RST:
C1
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue] <Source>
Sets the input channel of the clock signal.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
*RST:
C1
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:EDGE <Slope>
Sets the edge at which the data value is sampled.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
182
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<Slope>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
POSitive
Rising edge
NEGative
Falling edge
EITHer
Rising and falling edges are considered (double data rate).
At double data rate, the edge at which the first bit of the pattern
is sampled is defined by TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:
FIRStedge.
*RST:
POSitive
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:FIRStedge <FirstClockEdge>
Sets the edge at which the first bit of the pattern is sampled.
The command is required if TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:EDGE is set to Either
(double data rate).
Parameters:
<FirstClockEdge>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST:
POSitive
TRIGger:SPATtern:ORDer <BitOrder>
Defines if the data words start with MSBF (most significant bit first) or LSBF (least significant bit first).
Parameters:
<BitOrder>
LSBF | MSBF
*RST:
MSBF
TRIGger:SPATtern:PATTern <Pattern>
Defines the serial pattern to be triggered on.
Parameters:
<Pattern>
Example:
12.3.5.11
String that contains the pattern in binary format. The parameter
accepts the bit value X (don't care).
TRIGger:SPATtern:PATTern '11001100'
TRIGger:SPATtern:PATTern '110011XX'
Timeout Trigger
TRIGger:TIMeout:RANGe............................................................................................... 184
TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME.................................................................................................. 184
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
183
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:TIMeout:RANGe <TimeoutMode>
Selects the relation of the signal level to the trigger level, which is specified with
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:VALue
Parameters:
<TimeoutMode>
HIGH | LOW | EITHer
*RST:
HIGH
TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME <Time>
Sets the time limit for the timeout at which the instrument triggers.
Parameters:
<Time>
12.3.5.12
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
100E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
Window Trigger
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:LOWer............................................................................... 184
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:UPPer................................................................................184
TRIGger:WINDow:TIME..................................................................................................184
TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe.............................................................................................. 185
TRIGger:WINDow:WIDTh............................................................................................... 185
TRIGger:WINDow:DELTa............................................................................................... 186
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:LOWer <Level>
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:UPPer <Level>
Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds for the window trigger, respectively. The
trigger levels are the vertical window limits.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Level>
.
1..22
1..4: Indicates the trigger source: analog channel 1 to 4
5..22: not available
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-10 to 10
1E-3
0
V
TRIGger:WINDow:TIME <Condition>
Selects how the time limit of the window is defined.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
184
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
Parameters:
<Condition>
LONGer | SHORter | EQUal | NEQual | WITHin | OUTSide
LONGer | SHORter
Triggers if the signal crosses the upper or lower level after/
before the time "Width" defined by TRIGger:WINDow:WIDTh
EQUal | NEQual
Triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window
limits for a time equal/uneuqal to "Width" "±Tolerance" defined
by TRIGger:WINDow:WIDTh and TRIGger:WINDow:DELTa.
WITHin
Triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window
limits for a time ≥"Min Width" AND ≤ "Max Width".
OUTSide
Triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window
limits for a time < "Min Width" OR > "Max Width".
*RST:
LONGer
TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe <LevelRangeMode>
Selects how the signal run is compared with the window:
Parameters:
<LevelRangeMode> ENTer | EXIT | WITHin | OUTSide
ENTer | EXIT
Triggers when the signal crosses the upper or lower level and
thus enters/leaves the window made up of these two levels
which are defined by TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:UPPer
and TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:LOWer
WITHin | OUTSide
Triggers if the signal stays between/above the upper and lower
level for a specified time. The time is defined by TRIGger:
WINDow:TIME
*RST:
ENTer
TRIGger:WINDow:WIDTh <Duration>
Sets the width for comparison ranges LONGer, SHORter, EQUal, NEQual.
See TRIGger:WINDow:TIME on page 184.
Parameters:
<Duration>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
185
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Setup
TRIGger:WINDow:DELTa <Tolerance>
Sets a range Δt to the specified width, which is defined using TRIGger:WINDow:
WIDTh.
Parameters:
<Tolerance>
12.3.5.13
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 5000
500E-12
0
s
Interval Trigger
TRIGger:INTerval:SLOPe............................................................................................... 186
TRIGger:INTerval:RANGe...............................................................................................186
TRIGger:INTerval:WIDTh................................................................................................187
TRIGger:INTerval:DELTa................................................................................................187
TRIGger:INTerval:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the edge direction for the trigger. You can analyze the inteval between positive
edges or between negative edges.
Parameters:
<Slope>
POSitive | NEGative
*RST:
POSitive
TRIGger:INTerval:RANGe <Condition>
Defines how the time range of an interval is defined.
Parameters:
<Condition>
LONGer | SHORter | EQUal | NEQual | WITHin | OUTSide
LONGer | SHORter
Triggers on intervals shorter or longer than an interval that is set
using TRIGger:INTerval:WIDTh.
EQUal | NEQual
Triggers on intervals equal or not equal a given interval width
that is set using TRIGger:INTerval:WIDTh. In addition, a tolerance can be set around the specified width using TRIGger:
INTerval:DELTa.
WITHin | OUTSide
Triggers on intervals inside or outside a given range. The range
is set using ... and ....
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
LONGer
186
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
TRIGger:INTerval:WIDTh <Duration>
Sets the time between two pulses for comparisons EQUal, UNEQual, SHORter, and
LONGer.
Parameters:
<Duration>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
800E-12 to 10000
100E-9
5E-9
s
TRIGger:INTerval:DELTa <Tolerance>
Sets a range Δt to the specified width, which is defined using TRIGger:INTerval:
WIDTh.
Parameters:
<Tolerance>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 5000
500E-12
0
s
12.4 Waveform Analysis
12.4.1 Zoom
See also Chapter 3.1, "Zoom", on page 72.
ZOOM:ENABle.............................................................................................................. 187
ZOOM:SCALe............................................................................................................... 187
ZOOM:POSition.............................................................................................................188
ZOOM:ENABle <Enabled>
Enables or disables the zoom.
Parameters:
<Enabled>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
ZOOM:SCALe <Scale>
Sets the time scale of the zoomed waveform.
Depending on the recording time not all horizontal scales are available. This is due to
the fact that, the zoom is always displaying a complete curve.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
187
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
Parameters:
<Scale>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1E-12 to 500
1E-12
100E-9
s
ZOOM:POSition <Position>
Sets the center position of the zoomed area in relation to the trigger point.
Parameters:
<Position>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-500 to 500
1E-12
0
s
12.4.2 Automatic Measurements
In remote commands for automatic measurements, the suffix <m> defines the measurement index. You can perform up to four different measurements simultaneously.
●
●
12.4.2.1
Measurement Settings.......................................................................................... 188
Measurement Results........................................................................................... 190
Measurement Settings
MEASurement<m>:ENABle............................................................................................ 188
MEASurement<m>:SOURce........................................................................................... 188
MEASurement<m>:TYPE............................................................................................... 189
MEASurement<m>:AOFF............................................................................................... 189
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe...................................................................................190
MEASurement<m>:ENABle <State>
Enables or disables the measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
MEASurement<m>:SOURce <Source>, [<Source2>]
Defines the waveform to be measured. For delay, phase, and power measurements, 2
sources are required.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
188
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
The sources can be any active input signal, math or reference waveform. Available
source waveforms depend on the measurement type, see Chapter 3.2.2, "Measurement Types", on page 74.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | M1 | R | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
<Source2>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | M1 | R | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
MEASurement<m>:TYPE <Type>
Selects the measurement type. For a detailed description, see Chapter 3.2.2, "Measurement Types", on page 74.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Type>
.
1..4
PERiod | FREQuency | RTIMe | FTIMe | PPULse | NPULse |
PDCYcle | NDCYcle | DELay | PHASe | MEAN | RMS | CRESt |
STDDev | MINimum | MAXimum | PKPK | BASelevel |
TOPLevel | AMPLitude | OVRShoot | PREShoot | AC | DC |
ACDC | PPCount | NPCount | RECount | FECount | PWRP |
PWRS | PWRQ | PWRFactor
*RST:
MINimum
RTIMe
Rise time
PREShoot
Preshoot
FTIMe
Fall time
PPCount
Positive pulse count
PPULse
Positive pulse width
NPCount
Negative pulse count
NPULse
Negative pulse width
RECount
Rising edge count
PDCYcle
Positive duty cycle
FECount
Falling edge count
NDCYcle
Negative duty cycle
PWRP
Active power
STDDev
Standard deviation
PWRS
Apparent power
PKPK
Peak to peak
PWRQ
Reactive power
OVRShoot
Overshoot
PWRFactor
Power factor
MEASurement<m>:AOFF
Disables all active measurements.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
The suffix is irrelevant.
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
189
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the slope for the delay measurement type.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Parameters:
<Slope>
POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
POSitive
Delay between the first rising edge of each source waveform.
NEGative
Delay between the first falling edge of each source waveform.
EITHer
Delay between the first edge of each source waveform, no matter if it is rising or falling.
*RST:
12.4.2.2
POSitive
Measurement Results
MEASurement<m>:RESult:ACTual?
Returns the result of the indicated measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Result>
Usage:
.
1..4
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 100E-12
*RST:
0
Query only
MEASurement<m>:RESult:LIMit?
Indicates whether the measurement results are inside the measurement range, or outside (clipping).
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Return values:
<ResultLimit>
INSide | OVERflow | UNDerflow | OVUNflow
*RST:
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
INSide
Query only
190
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
12.4.3 Cursor Measurements
●
●
12.4.3.1
Cursor Settings..................................................................................................... 191
Cursor Measurement Results............................................................................... 192
Cursor Settings
CURSor:STATe............................................................................................................. 191
CURSor:FUNCtion......................................................................................................... 191
CURSor:SOURce...........................................................................................................191
CURSor:COUPling.........................................................................................................191
CURSor:SCPLing...........................................................................................................192
CURSor:SCReen........................................................................................................... 192
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:TYPE.................................................................................. 192
CURSor:STATe <State>
Enables or disables the cursor measurement.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
CURSor:FUNCtion <Type>
Defines the type of the cursor measurement.
Parameters:
<Type>
VERTical | HORizontal | TRACking | MEASure
See Chapter 3.3.1, "Cursor Types and Results", on page 80.
*RST:
VERTical
CURSor:SOURce <Source>
Defines the source on which the cursor measurement is performed. The source setting
is not relevant for the vertical cursor type.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | M1 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
*RST:
C1
CURSor:COUPling <Coupling>
Couples the cursor lines so that the distance between the two lines remains the same
if one cursor is moved.
Parameters:
<Coupling>
ON | OFF
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
OFF
191
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
CURSor:SCPLing <ScaleCoupling>
If ON, the position of the cursor lines is adjusted if the vertical or horizontal scales are
changed. If OFF, the cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is
changed.
Parameters:
<ScaleCoupling>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
CURSor:SCReen
Sets the cursors to a default position on the screen.
Usage:
Event
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:TYPE <Type>
Sets the automatic measurements to be performed on the source waveform between
the cursor lines. The setting is only available if CURSor:FUNCtion is set to MEASure.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Type>
.
1..2
Defines the measurement index. Two simultaneous cursor measurements can be performed.
PERiod | FREQuency | RTIMe | FTIMe | PPULse | NPULse |
PDCYcle | NDCYcle | MEAN | RMS | CRESt | STDDev |
MINimum | MAXimum | PKPK | BASelevel | TOPLevel |
AMPLitude | OVRShoot | PREShoot | AC | DC | ACDC |
PPCount | NPCount | RECount | FECount
See MEASurement<m>:TYPE on page 189.
*RST:
12.4.3.2
MINimum
Cursor Measurement Results
CURSor:TDELta?...........................................................................................................193
CURSor:ITDelta?........................................................................................................... 193
CURSor:X1Position........................................................................................................193
CURSor:X2Position........................................................................................................193
CURSor:DELTa?........................................................................................................... 193
CURSor:Y1Position........................................................................................................193
CURSor:Y2Position........................................................................................................193
CURSor:Y1AMplitude?................................................................................................... 194
CURSor:Y2AMplitude?................................................................................................... 194
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:ACTual?................................................................... 194
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:LIMit?....................................................................... 194
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
192
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
CURSor:TDELta?
Returns the time difference Δ between to vertical cursor lines.
Return values:
<ResultDeltaT>
Usage:
Range:
*RST:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
0
Query only
CURSor:ITDelta?
Returns the inverse value of time difference between to vertical cursor lines1/Δt.
Return values:
<ResultDeltaTInv>
Usage:
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 0
*RST:
0
Query only
CURSor:X1Position <UserX1>
CURSor:X2Position <UserX2>
Set the horizontal positions t1 and t2 (time) of the vertical cursor lines.
Parameters:
<UserX1>, <UserX2> Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
CURSor:DELTa?
Returns the absolute value of the difference between the positions of horizontal cursor
lines Δy.
Return values:
<ResultDelta>
Usage:
Range:
*RST:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
0
Query only
CURSor:Y1Position <UserY1>
CURSor:Y2Position <UserY2>
Set the vertical positions y1 and y2 of the horizontal cursor lines.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
193
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
Parameters:
<UserY1>, <UserY2> Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-6
0
V
CURSor:Y1AMplitude?
CURSor:Y2AMplitude?
Return the vertical values of the crossing points between the tracking cursors and the
source waveform.
Return values:
<ResultAmplitude1> Range:
<ResultAmplitude2> *RST:
Usage:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
0
Query only
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:ACTual?
Returns the result of the indicated cursor measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Result>
Usage:
.
1..2
Defines the measurement index. Two simultaneous cursor measurements can be performed.
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 100E-12
*RST:
0
Query only
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:LIMit?
Indicates whether the measurement results are inside the measurement range, or outside (clipping).
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<ResultLimit>
.
1..2
Defines the measurement index. Two simultaneous cursor measurements can be performed.
INSide | OVERflow | UNDerflow | OVUNflow
*RST:
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
INSide
Query only
194
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
12.4.4 Math Waveforms
12.4.4.1
Math Settings
CALCulate:MATH:STATe................................................................................................195
CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine]........................................................................ 195
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:SCALe................................................................................. 195
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:RANGe................................................................................ 196
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:POSition.............................................................................. 196
CALCulate:MATH:STATe <State>
Enables or disables the math channel.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <ExprDefinition>
Sets the operation to calculate a math waveform.
Parameters:
<ExprDefinition>
String that defines the operation. x is the channel number of
source 1, y the channel number of source 2.
Addition: 'Cx+Cy'
Subtraction: 'Cx-Cy'
Multiplication: 'Cx*Cy'
Inverse: '-Cx'
Absolute value: 'Abs(Cx)'
Square: 'Pow(Cx)'
Example:
CALC:MATH:EXPR:DEF 'C1-C2'
Subtracts the values of CH2 from the values of CH1.
CALC:MATH:EXPR:DEF 'Pow(C1)'
Squares the values of CH1.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:SCALe <Scale>
Sets the vertical scale (vertical sensitivity) of the math waveform.
Parameters:
<Scale>
Scale value, in V/div.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
195
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:RANGe <Position>
Sets the voltage range across the 8 vertical divisions of the diagram. Use the command alternatively to CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:SCALe.
Parameters:
<Position>
Voltage value of the range
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:POSition <Position>
Moves the math waveform or down in the diagram.
Parameters:
<Position>
Position value, given in divisions.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
12.4.5 Reference Waveforms
REFCurve:SOURce....................................................................................................... 196
REFCurve:UPDate.........................................................................................................196
REFCurve:STATe.......................................................................................................... 196
REFCurve:POSition....................................................................................................... 197
REFCurve:NAME...........................................................................................................197
REFCurve:SAVE............................................................................................................197
REFCurve:OPEN........................................................................................................... 197
REFCurve:DELete......................................................................................................... 197
REFCurve:SOURce <Source>
Selects the waveform to be taken as reference waveform.
Parameters:
<Source>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | M1
*RST:
C1
REFCurve:UPDate
Creates the reference waveform from the source waveform.
Usage:
Event
REFCurve:STATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the reference waveform.
Parameters:
<State>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
ON | OFF
196
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
REFCurve:POSition <Position>
Sets the vertical position of the reference waveform.
Parameters:
<Position>
Default unit: DIV
REFCurve:NAME <Name>
Defines the path, file name and file format of the reference waveform file.
The default path is C:/Users/<user>/Rohde-Schwarz/RTH/ReferenceCurves.
Parameters:
<Name>
Example:
String
:REFCurve:NAME 'C:
/Users/user1/Rohde-Schwarz/RTH/ReferenceCurves/reference001
REFCurve:SAVE
Saves the reference waveform. The target file is specified using REFCurve:NAME.
Usage:
Event
REFCurve:OPEN
Loads a stored reference waveform from the specified file. The file is specified using
REFCurve:NAME.
Usage:
Event
REFCurve:DELete
Deletes a stored reference waveform file. The file is specified using REFCurve:NAME.
Usage:
Event
12.4.6 History (Option R&S RTH-K15)
In CHANnell:HISTory commands, the channel suffix is irrelevant, omit it.
See also: Chapter 3.7, "History (Option R&S RTH-K15)", on page 90
CHANnel<m>:HISTory[:STATe].......................................................................................198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:NSEGments.................................................................................198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TPACq........................................................................................ 198
ACQuire:AVAilable?....................................................................................................... 198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt......................................................................................... 198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STOP..........................................................................................199
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent.....................................................................................199
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
197
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAY.......................................................................................... 199
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:REPLay.......................................................................................199
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?................................................................................200
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate?......................................................................................200
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?................................................................................. 200
CHANnel<m>:HISTory[:STATe] <State>
Enables or disables the history function.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:NSEGments <Depth>
Sets the approximate number of waveforms to be stored.
See also: "Number of Segments" on page 91.
Parameters:
<Depth>
LOW | MEDium | HIGH
*RST:
LOW
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TPACq <PlayerSpeed>
Defines how fast the history player shows the stored waveforms.
Parameters:
<PlayerSpeed>
AUTO | SLOW | MEDium | FAST
*RST:
AUTO
ACQuire:AVAilable?
Shows the number of segements that are stored in the history.
Return values:
<AvailableAcqs>
Usage:
Range:
0 to 5000
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Query only
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt <StartAcqIdx>
Sets the index of the first (older) history segment that you want to see in the history
player. To query the number of available segments, use ACQuire:AVAilable?.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
198
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Waveform Analysis
Parameters:
<StartAcqIdx>
Range:
-4999 to 0
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STOP <StopAcqIdx>
Sets the index of the last (newer) history segment that you want to see in the history
player. To query the number of available segments, use ACQuire:AVAilable?. The
newest segment has always the index "0". Older segments have a negative index.
Parameters:
<StopAcqIdx>
Example:
Range:
-4999 to 0
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
CHANnel:STARt -199
CHANnel:STOP -100
The segments 101 (index -100) to 200 (index -199) in the history
player.
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent <CurrAcqIdx>
Accesses a particular segment in the memory to display it. The query returns the index
of the segment that is shown.
To determine the number of stored segments, use ACQuire:AVAilable?.
Parameters:
<CurrAcqIdx>
History index: the newest segment has the index "0", older segments have a negative index: -(n-1), .... -1 , 0
n is the number of acquired segments.
Range:
0 to -(n-1)
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAY
Starts and stops the playback of the history segments.
Example:
CHANnel:HISTory:PLAY; *OPC
See also Chapter B, "Command Sequence and Synchronization", on page 241.
Usage:
Event
Asynchronous command
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:REPLay <AutoRepeat>
If set to ON, the playback of the selected history segments repeats automatically.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
199
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Mask Testing
Parameters:
<AutoRepeat>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?
Returns the abolsute daytime of the current segment (CHANnel<m>:HISTory:
CURRent).
Return values:
<TimeStampAbsTime>String containing the time and unit.
Usage:
Query only
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate?
Returns the date of the current segment (CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent).
Return values:
<TimeStampAbsData>String with date of the current acquisition (absolute time)
Usage:
Query only
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?
Returns the relative time of the current segment - the time difference to the newest
segment (index = 0).
See also CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent.
Return values:
<TimeStampRel>
String containing the relative time in seconds.
Usage:
Query only
12.5 Mask Testing
12.5.1 Mask Definition
The suffix <m> selects the mask channel for which the command is executed. The
number of channels depends on the instrument type. The R&S RTH1004 has 5 mask
channels, the suffix values are 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5. The R&S RTH1002 has 3 mask channels, the suffix values are 1 | 2 | 5. Suffix 5 is used for the mask on a math waveform.
MASK:CHANnel<m>:STATe........................................................................................... 201
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:XWIDth........................................................................ 201
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:YWIDth........................................................................ 201
MASK:CHANnel<m>:CREatemask.................................................................................. 201
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
200
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Mask Testing
MASK:CHANnel<m>:STATe <State>
Turns the selected mask on or off.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:XWIDth <WidthX>
Changes the width of the selected mask in horizontal direction.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<WidthX>
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 10
0.01
0
div
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:YWIDth <WidthY>
Changes the width of the selected mask in vertical direction.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<WidthY>
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 8
0.01
0.1
div
MASK:CHANnel<m>:CREatemask
Creates a mask from the envelope waveform of the selected waveform with the
defined width i x and y direction.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
201
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Mask Testing
12.5.2 Mask Test
MASK:ONViolation[:SELection]....................................................................................... 202
MASK:RST....................................................................................................................202
MASK[:TESTstate]?....................................................................................................... 202
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL:PERCentage?..............................................................202
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL[:COUNt]?.....................................................................203
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS:PERCentage?............................................................ 203
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS[:COUNt]?...................................................................203
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:TOTL[:COUNt]?................................................................... 204
MASK:ELAPsedtime:TOTal?...........................................................................................204
MASK:ELAPsedtime[:SECS]?......................................................................................... 204
MASK:ONViolation[:SELection] <SelectedActions>
Defines the action to be executed if a violation occurs.
Parameters:
<SelectedActions>
NONE | STOP | BEEP | BPSTop
*RST:
NONE
MASK:RST
Sets the counters of passed and failed acquisitions to Zero.
Usage:
Event
MASK[:TESTstate]?
Returns the state of the mask test.
Return values:
<TestState>
NOMask | IDLE | RUNNing
NOMask
No mask is active and no testing possible.
IDLE
Mask test has been stopped or not yet started.
RUNNing
Test ist running.
*RST:
Usage:
NOMask
Query only
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL:PERCentage?
Returns the percentage share of failed acquisitions.
Suffix:
<m>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
202
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Mask Testing
Return values:
<FailedPercentage> Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Usage:
0 to 100
0.1
0
%
Query only
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL[:COUNt]?
Returns the number of failed acquisitions.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<FailedCount>
Usage:
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Range:
0 to 0
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Query only
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS:PERCentage?
Returns the percentage share of passed acquisitions.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Return values:
<PassedPercentage> Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Usage:
0 to 100
0.1
0
%
Query only
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS[:COUNt]?
Returns the number of passed acquisitions.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<PassedCount>
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Range:
0 to 0
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Query only
203
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Multimeter Measurements
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:TOTL[:COUNt]?
Returns the number of tested acquisitions.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<ResultTotal>
Usage:
.
1|2|5 (RTH1002) , 1..5 (RTH1004)
Range:
0 to 0
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Query only
MASK:ELAPsedtime:TOTal? <Day>, <Hour>, <Min>, <Sec>
Returns the test duration.
Query parameters:
<Day>
Test time in days.
<Hour>
Test time in hours.
<Min>
Test time in minutes.
<Sec>
Test time in seconds.
Return values:
<ZSec>
Test time in deciseconds.
Usage:
Query only
MASK:ELAPsedtime[:SECS]?
Returns the test duration in seconds.
Return values:
<Sec>
Time in seconds
Usage:
Query only
12.6 Multimeter Measurements
METer<m>:SENSe:STATe..............................................................................................204
METer<m>:SENSe:SOURce...........................................................................................205
METer<m>:SENSe:RANGe............................................................................................ 205
METer<m>:READ?........................................................................................................ 205
METer<m>:FETCh?....................................................................................................... 206
METer<m>:SENSe:STATe <State>
Only valid for R&S RTH1004: Activates the voltmeter measurement.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
204
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Multimeter Measurements
In R&S RTH1002, the multimeter ia active as soon as the the "Meter" mode is on
(OP[:MODE]).
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<State>
.
1..4
Selects the voltmeter.
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
METer<m>:SENSe:SOURce <InputChannel>
Only relevant for R&S RTH1004: Selects the input channel to be measured by the
specified voltmeter.
In R&S RTH1002, the source is always the multimeter input, the command can be
omitted.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<InputChannel>
.
1..4
Selects the voltmeter.
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4
*RST:
C1
METer<m>:SENSe:RANGe <MeterRangeUI>
Sets the measurement range for the meter.
In R&S RTH1004, the command adjusts the range of the input channel that is measured by the meter.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<MeterRangeUI>
.
1..4
R&S RTH1002: always 1, omit the suffix
R&S RTH1004: Selects the voltmeter.
The range depends on the selected measurement type.
Range:
0.1 to 300
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
0.1
METer<m>:READ?
Starts a new measurement, returns the current measurement result and deletes the
memory.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
205
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Result>
Usage:
.
1..4
R&S RTH1002: always 1, omit the suffix
R&S RTH1004: Selects the voltmeter.
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
0
0
V
Query only
METer<m>:FETCh?
Returns all measurement results that are saved in the memory. You can use the command several times to retrieve the same data.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<NumericResult>
Usage:
.
1..4
R&S RTH1002: always 1, omit the suffix
R&S RTH1004: Selects the voltmeter.
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
0
0
V
Query only
12.7 Data Logging
●
●
●
●
Logger Settings.....................................................................................................206
Cursor in Logger Mode......................................................................................... 208
Zoom in Logger mode........................................................................................... 210
Logger Statistics ...................................................................................................211
12.7.1 Logger Settings
LOGGer:SOURce.......................................................................................................... 207
LOGGer:TIMebase:SRATe............................................................................................. 207
LOGGer:TIMebase:SCALe..............................................................................................207
LOGGer:SLOT:CURRent................................................................................................207
LOGGer:SLOT:LOAD..................................................................................................... 207
LOGGer:SLOT:CLEar.....................................................................................................208
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
206
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
LOGGer:SOURce <Source>
Sets the logger source.
Parameters:
<Source>
SCOPe | METer
LOGGer:TIMebase:SRATe <NextSampleRate>
Sets the number of samples per second.
Parameters:
<NextSampleRate>
SA1 | SA2 | SA5 | SA10
*RST:
SA1
LOGGer:TIMebase:SCALe <NextHorizScale>
Selects the horizontal scale of the logged data.
Parameters:
<NextHorizScale>
AUTO | S1 | S2 | S4 | S5 | S10 | S20 | S40 | M1 | M2 | M4 | M5 |
M10 | M20 | M40 | H1 | H2 | H4 | H5 | H10 | H20 | D1 | D2 | D4
S1 | S2 | S4 | S5 | S10 | S20 | S40
Seconds per division
M1 | M2 | M4 | M5 | M10 | M20 | M40
Minutes per division
H1 | H2 | H4 | H5 | H10 | H20
Hours per division
D1 | D2 | D4
Days per division
*RST:
AUTO
LOGGer:SLOT:CURRent <SelectedSlot>
Selects one of the 10 memory slots to store the data during the logging. It is possible to
change the slot during recording.
Parameters:
<SelectedSlot>
SLOT1 | SLOT2 | SLOT3 | SLOT4 | SLOT5 | SLOT6 | SLOT7 |
SLOT8 | SLOT9 | SLOT10
*RST:
SLOT1
LOGGer:SLOT:LOAD
Loads the stored log data of a slot. The slot is defined using LOGGer:SLOT:CURRent.
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Event
207
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
LOGGer:SLOT:CLEar
Deletes the log data of a slot. The slot is defined using LOGGer:SLOT:CURRent.
Only possible while logging is stopped.
Usage:
Event
12.7.2 Cursor in Logger Mode
12.7.2.1
Cursor Settings
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:STATe..........................................................................................208
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:TYPE........................................................................................... 208
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCPLing.......................................................................................208
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:COUPling..................................................................................... 209
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCReen....................................................................................... 209
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:STATe <Enabled>
Enables or disables the logger cursor measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..2
Parameters:
<Enabled>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:TYPE <Value>
If data logging is running for more than 2 days and 7 hours, the logger compresses 4
logging values into a minimum, average and maximum value. The command sets the
measured crossing point between the cursor lines and the waveform.
For logging periods shorter than 2 days and 7 hours, tha command is not relevant.
Parameters:
<Value>
MINimum | AVERage | MAXimum
*RST:
AVERage
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCPLing <TrackScaling>
If ON, the position of the cursor lines is adjusted when the horizontal scale is changed.
If OFF, the cursor lines remain on their position on the display when the scaling is
changed.
Suffix:
<m>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
1..2
208
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
Parameters:
<TrackScaling>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:COUPling <Coupling>
Couples the cursor lines so that the distance between the two lines remains the same
when one cursor is moved.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..2
Parameters:
<Coupling>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCReen
Sets the cursors to a default position on the screen.
12.7.2.2
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..2
Usage:
Event
Cursor Results
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:POSition.......................................................................................209
LOGGer:CURSor:TDELta?............................................................................................. 210
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:RESult<n>[:AMPLitude]?................................................................210
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:POSition
<Year>,<Month>,<Day>,<Hours>,<Minutes>,<Seconds>,<TenthsOfSecond>
Sets the positions of the cursor lines.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Year>
.
1..2
Specifies the cursor line.
Range:
2015 to 9999
Increment: 1
*RST:
2015
<Month>
Range:
1 to 12
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
<Day>
Range:
1 to 31
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
209
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
<Hours>
Range:
0 to 23
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
<Minutes>
Range:
0 to 59
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
<Seconds>
Range:
0 to 59
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
<TenthsOfSecond>
Range:
0 to 9
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
LOGGer:CURSor:TDELta?
Returns the time difference of the cursor lines.
Return values:
<Day>,<Hour>,<Min>,<Sec>,<ZSec>
Usage:
Query only
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:RESult<n>[:AMPLitude]?
Returns the measured value at the specified cursor line.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..2
Specifies the cursor line.
<n>
1..4
Specifies the measurement.
Return values:
<Yvalue>
Measurement value
Usage:
Query only
12.7.3 Zoom in Logger mode
LOGGer:ZOOM:ENABle................................................................................................. 210
LOGGer:ZOOM:SCALe.................................................................................................. 211
LOGGer:ZOOM:POSition................................................................................................211
LOGGer:ZOOM:ENABle <Zoom Enabled>
Enables or disables the logger zoom.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
210
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
Parameters:
<Zoom Enabled>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
LOGGer:ZOOM:SCALe <Zoom Scale>
Sets the time scale of the zoomed waveform.
Parameters:
<Zoom Scale>
AUTO | S1 | S2 | S4 | S5 | S10 | S20 | S40 | M1 | M2 | M4 | M5 |
M10 | M20 | M40 | H1 | H2 | H4 | H5 | H10 | H20 | D1 | D2 | D4
LOGGer:ZOOM:POSition <Year>,<Month>,<Day>,<Hour>,<Min>,<Sec>
Sets the center position of the zoomed area in relation to the left side of the display.
12.7.4 Logger Statistics
LOGGer:RECording:STARt?........................................................................................... 211
LOGGer:RECording:TOTal?............................................................................................211
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:CURRentsampl?....................................................... 212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:POSition?................................................. 212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:VALue?.................................................... 212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:POSition?.................................................. 212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:VALue?..................................................... 213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MEAN?.....................................................................213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev?..................................................................213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:ENABled?............................................................................213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:TYPE?................................................................................ 214
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:SOURce?............................................................................ 214
LOGGer:RECording:STARt?
Returns the absolute start time of the current loggin session.
Return values:
<StartTime>
Usage:
Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, decisecond, for example 2015,10,29,16,10,22,2
Query only
LOGGer:RECording:TOTal?
Returns the total duration of the current logging session.
Return values:
<Day>;<Hour>;<Min>;<Sec>;<ZSec>
For example: 1;1;42;32;2
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Query only
211
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:CURRentsampl?
Returns the actual logging value of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<CurrentSample>
Usage:
.
1..4
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 100E-12
*RST:
0
Query only
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:POSition?
Returns the time stamp of the maximum logging value of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Return values:
<TimeOfMax>
Usage:
Query only
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:VALue?
Returns the maximum logging value of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Maximum>
Usage:
.
1..4
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 100E-12
*RST:
0
Query only
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:POSition?
Returns the time stamp of the minimum logging value of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Return values:
<TimeOfMin>
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Query only
212
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Data Logging
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:VALue?
Returns the minimum logging value of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Minimum>
Usage:
.
1..4
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 100E-12
*RST:
0
Query only
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MEAN?
Returns the mean logging value of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Average>
Usage:
.
1..4
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 100E-12
*RST:
0
Query only
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev?
Returns the standard deviation value of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<StdDeviation>
Usage:
.
1..4
Range:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
Increment: 100E-12
*RST:
0
Query only
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:ENABled?
Returns the measurement state of scope and meter measurements.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Return values:
<Enabled>
ON | OFF
*RST:
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
OFF
Query only
213
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:TYPE?
Returns the measurement type of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
.
1..4
Return values:
<Type>
See MEASurement<m>:TYPE on page 189.
Usage:
Query only
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:SOURce?
Returns the source channel of the selected measurement.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Source>
.
1..4
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | M1 | R1 | XY | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 |
D6 | D7
<Source2>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | M1 | R1 | XY | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 |
D6 | D7
Usage:
Query only
12.8 Protocol Analysis
●
●
●
●
General Protocol Settings..................................................................................... 214
I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1).................................................................................... 215
SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1).................................................................................... 222
UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)........................................ 223
12.8.1 General Protocol Settings
BUS:FORMat <NumberFormat>
Sets the decoding format of the data.
Parameters:
<NumberFormat>
BIN | OCT | DEC | HEX | ASCii
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
HEX
214
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
12.8.2 I2C (Option R&S RTH-K1)
12.8.2.1
I2C Configuration Settings
BUS:I2C:SCL:SOURce...................................................................................................215
BUS:I2C:SDA:SOURce.................................................................................................. 215
BUS:I2C:TECHnology.................................................................................................... 215
BUS:I2C:SCL:THReshold............................................................................................... 215
BUS:I2C:SDA:THReshold............................................................................................... 215
BUS:I2C:SCL:SOURce <Channel>
BUS:I2C:SDA:SOURce <Channel>
Set the input channels of the I2C lines.
Parameters:
<Channel>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
C3 and C4: only R&S RTH1004
Digital channels are available if option R&S RTH-B1 is installed.
*RST:
C1
BUS:I2C:TECHnology <ThresholdType>
Sets the threshold values of all I2C lines as defined for various signal technologies.
Parameters:
<ThresholdType>
TTL | ECL | CMOS | USER
USER: Set a user-defined value for each line using the
BUS:I2C:<line>:THReshold commands.
*RST:
Usage:
TTL
SCPI confirmed
BUS:I2C:SCL:THReshold <ThresUserValue>
BUS:I2C:SDA:THReshold <ThresUserValue>
Set a user-defined threshold value for the corresponding line if BUS:I2C:
TECHnology is set to USER.
Parameters:
<ThresUserValue>
12.8.2.2
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-8 to 8
1E-3
1.4
V
I2C Decode Results
The frame suffix <m> selects the frame index for which the result is queried.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
215
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
The byte suffix <n> selects the byte index for which the result is queried.
BUS:I2C:FCOunt?..........................................................................................................216
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:AACCess?.....................................................................................216
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ACCess?.......................................................................................216
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ACOMplete?..................................................................................217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADBStart?..................................................................................... 217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADDRess?.................................................................................... 217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADEVice?......................................................................................217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:AMODe?....................................................................................... 218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ASTart?.........................................................................................218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BCOunt?....................................................................................... 218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:ACCess?........................................................................218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:ACKStart?...................................................................... 219
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:COMPlete?.....................................................................219
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:STARt?.......................................................................... 219
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:VALue?.......................................................................... 220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:DATA?.......................................................................................... 220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:RWBStart?.................................................................................... 220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STARt?......................................................................................... 220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STATus?.......................................................................................221
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STOP?..........................................................................................221
BUS:I2C:FCOunt?
Returns the number of decoded frames.
Return values:
<Count>
Total number of decoded frames.
Usage:
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:AACCess?
Returns the address acknowledge bit value for the indicated frame.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Return values:
<AddressAckBit>
INComplete | ACK | NACK | EITHer
*RST:
Usage:
INComplete
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ACCess?
Returns the value of the R/W bit of the indicated frame.
Suffix:
<m>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
*
216
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Return values:
<RWBit>
READ | WRITe | EITHer | UNDefined
*RST:
Usage:
UNDefined
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ACOMplete?
Returns if the address is completely contained in the acquisition.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Return values:
<AddressComplete> 1 | 0
*RST:
Usage:
OFF
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADBStart?
Returns the start time of the address acknowledge bit.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Return values:
<AddressAckBitStart> Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Usage:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADDRess?
Returns the address value of the indicated frame including the R/W bit.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Address>
Usage:
.
*
Range:
0 to 2047
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADEVice?
Returns the pure device address of the indicated frame without the R/W bit.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
217
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<DeviceAddress>
Usage:
.
*
Range:
0 to 1023
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:AMODe?
Returns the address length.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Return values:
<AddressType>
BIT7 | BIT7_RW | BIT10 | AUTO | ANY
*RST:
Usage:
BIT7
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ASTart?
Returns the start time of the address for the indicated frame.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Return values:
<AddressStartTime> Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Usage:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BCOunt?
Returns the number of bytes in the specified frame.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Return values:
<Count>
Byte count
Usage:
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:ACCess?
Returns the acknowledge bit value of the specified data byte.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
218
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
<n>
*
Return values:
<AckBit>
INComplete | ACK | NACK | EITHer
*RST:
Usage:
INComplete
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:ACKStart?
Returns the start time of the acknowledge bit of the specified byte.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
<n>
*
Return values:
<AckBitStartTime>
Usage:
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:COMPlete?
Returns if the indicated byte is completely contained in the acquisition.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
<n>
*
Return values:
<IsComplete>
1|0
*RST:
Usage:
OFF
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:STARt?
Returns the start time of the specified data byte.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
<n>
*
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
219
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Return values:
<StartTime>
Usage:
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:VALue?
Returns the data value of the specified byte.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
<n>
*
Return values:
<Value>
Usage:
Range:
0 to 255
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:DATA?
Returns the data words of the specified frame.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Parameters:
<Data>
Comma-separated list of values.
Usage:
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:RWBStart?
Returns the start time of the R/W bit
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<RWBitStartTime>
Usage:
.
*
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STARt?
Returns the start time of the specified frame.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
220
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<StartTime>
Usage:
.
*
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STATus?
Returns the overall state of the frame.
Suffix:
<m>
.
*
Return values:
<Status>
INComplete | OK | UNEXpstop | INSufficient | ADDifferent
INComplete
The stop bit is missing.
OK
The frame is valid.
UNEXpstop
A stop bit was detected but clock and data are continued.
INSufficient
The frame is not completely contained in the acquisition. The
acquired part of the frame is valid.
ADDifferent
Error in 10 bit address. In case of a read access on a 10 bit
address, the first address byte is sent twice, first as write, the
second as read. The first seven bits of the byte must be identical. If they are not identical, the ADDiffernt error is indicated.
*RST:
Usage:
OK
Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STOP?
Returns the end time of the specified frame.
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<StopTime>
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
.
*
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100E+24 to 100E+24
100E-12
0
s
221
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Usage:
Query only
12.8.3 SPI (Option R&S RTH-K1)
12.8.3.1
SPI Configuration Settings
BUS:SPI:SCLK:SOURce................................................................................................ 222
BUS:SPI:SSEL:SOURce.................................................................................................222
BUS:SPI:MOSI:SOURce.................................................................................................222
BUS:SPI:MISO:SOURce.................................................................................................222
BUS:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe...................................................................................................222
BUS:SPI:SSEL:POLarity.................................................................................................222
BUS:SPI:TECHnology.................................................................................................... 223
BUS:SPI:SCLK:THReshold............................................................................................. 223
BUS:SPI:SSEL:THReshold............................................................................................. 223
BUS:SPI:MOSI:THReshold............................................................................................. 223
BUS:SPI:MISO:THReshold............................................................................................. 223
BUS:SPI:WSIZe.............................................................................................................223
BUS:SPI:SCLK:SOURce <Channel>
BUS:SPI:SSEL:SOURce <Channel>
BUS:SPI:MOSI:SOURce <Channel>
BUS:SPI:MISO:SOURce <Channel>
Set the input channels of the SPI lines.
Parameters:
<Channel>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
C3 and C4: only R&S RTH1004
Digital channels are available if option R&S RTH-B1 is installed.
*RST:
C1
BUS:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe <ClockEdge>
Selects if data are sampled on the rising or falling slope of the clock. The clock slope
marks the begin of a new bit.
Parameters:
<ClockEdge>
POSitive | NEGative
*RST:
POSitive
BUS:SPI:SSEL:POLarity <ChipSelectPolarity>
Selects whether the chip select signal is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1).
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
222
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Parameters:
<ChipSelectPolarity> ACTLow | ACTHigh
*RST:
ACTHigh
BUS:SPI:TECHnology <ThresholdType>
Sets the threshold values of all SPI lines as defined for various signal technologies.
Parameters:
<ThresholdType>
TTL | ECL | CMOS | USER
USER: Set a user-defined value for each line using the
BUS:SPI:<line>:THReshold commands.
*RST:
Usage:
TTL
SCPI confirmed
BUS:SPI:SCLK:THReshold <ThresUserValue>
BUS:SPI:SSEL:THReshold <ThresUserValue>
BUS:SPI:MOSI:THReshold <ThresUserValue>
BUS:SPI:MISO:THReshold <ThresUserValue>
Set a user-defined value for the corresponding line if BUS:SPI:TECHnology is set to
USER.
Parameters:
<ThresUserValue>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-8 to 8
1E-3
1.4
V
BUS:SPI:WSIZe <WordLength>
Sets the number of bits in a word.
Parameters:
<WordLength>
WL4Bit | WL8Bit | WL12bit | WL16bit | WL20bit | WL24bit |
WL28bit | WL32bit
*RST:
WL8Bit
12.8.4 UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTH-K2)
12.8.4.1
UART Configuration
BUS:UART:SOURce...................................................................................................... 224
BUS:UART:POLarity...................................................................................................... 224
BUS:UART:THReshold...................................................................................................224
BUS:UART:STDBitrate................................................................................................... 224
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
223
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
BUS:UART:BITRate....................................................................................................... 225
BUS:UART:SSIZe.......................................................................................................... 225
BUS:UART:PARity......................................................................................................... 225
BUS:UART:SBIT............................................................................................................225
BUS:UART:ORDer.........................................................................................................226
BUS:UART:FRAMemode................................................................................................226
BUS:UART:TOUT.......................................................................................................... 226
BUS:UART:SOURce <Channel>
Selects the input channel of the UART line.
Parameters:
<Channel>
C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | D0 | D1 | D2 | D3 | D4 | D5 | D6 | D7
C3 and C4: only R&S RTH1004
Digital channels are available if option R&S RTH-B1 is installed.
*RST:
C1
BUS:UART:POLarity <Polarity>
Defines the logic states of the line. In idle high state, the idle state corresponds to a
logic 1, and the start bit to a logic 0. In idle low state, the idle state corresponds to a
logic 0, and the start bit to a logic 1. During idle time, no data is transmitted.
Parameters:
<Polarity>
IDLLow | IDLHigh
*RST:
IDLHigh
BUS:UART:THReshold <ThresUserValue>
Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals. If the signal value is higher than the
threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, the signal state is considered low.
Parameters:
<ThresUserValue>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-8 to 8
1E-3
1.4
V
BUS:UART:STDBitrate <Bitrate>
Sets the number of transmitted bits per second.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
224
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Protocol Analysis
Parameters:
<Bitrate>
BPS_300 | BPS_600 | BPS_1200 | BPS_2400 | BPS_4800 |
BPS_9600 | BPS_14400 | BPS_19200 | BPS_28800 |
BPS_38400 | BPS_56000 | BPS_57600 | BPS_115200 |
BPS_128000 | BPS_230400 | BPS_460800 | BPS_921600 |
CUSTom
Values in bits per second.
CUSTom: Set the bit rate using BUS:UART:BITRate.
*RST:
BPS_14400
BUS:UART:BITRate <CustomBitrate>
Sets a user-defined bit rate if BUS:UART:STDBitrate is set to CUSTom.
Parameters:
<CustomBitrate>
Range:
300 to 20000000
Increment: 1
*RST:
14400
BUS:UART:SSIZe <DataBits>
Sets the number of data bits in a word (symbol).
Parameters:
<DataBits>
B5 | B6 | B7 | B8 | B9
*RST:
B8
BUS:UART:PARity <Parity>
Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection.
Parameters:
<Parity>
NONE | ODD | EVEN
NONE
No parity bit is used.
ODD
The parity bit is set to "1" if the number of data bits set to "1" is
even.
EVEN
The parity bit is set to "1" if the number of data bits set to "1" is
odd.
*RST:
NONE
BUS:UART:SBIT <StopBits>
Sets the number of stop bits: 1 or 1.5 or 2 stop bits are possible.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
225
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
Parameters:
<StopBits>
B1 | B15 | B2
*RST:
B1
BUS:UART:ORDer <BitOrder>
Defines if a word starts with MSB (most significant bit) or LSB (least significant bit).
The display of the decoded signal considers this setting, results are displayed in the
specified order.
Parameters:
<BitOrder>
LSBF | MSBF
*RST:
MSBF
BUS:UART:FRAMemode <FrameMode>
IDLE defines frames of several words in the data stream, which are defined by a timeout between a stop bit and the next start bit. Enter the minimum timeout between two
frames using BUS:UART:TOUT.
Parameters:
<FrameMode>
NONE | IDLE
*RST:
NONE
BUS:UART:TOUT <IdleTime>
Sets the minimum timeout between two frames if BUS:UART:FRAMemode is set to
IDLE.
Parameters:
<IdleTime>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
100E-9 to 1
1E-3
1E-3
s
12.9 Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
LOGic:THCoupling......................................................................................................... 226
LOGic:GROup<m>:TECHnology..................................................................................... 227
LOGic:GROup<m>:USER...............................................................................................227
LOGic:GROup<m>:THReshold?......................................................................................227
LOGic:GROup<m>:HYSTeresis.......................................................................................228
POD:STATe?................................................................................................................ 228
LOGic:THCoupling <ThresCoup>
Couples the threshold and hysteresis settings for the logic channels.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
226
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
If enabled, all logic channels use the same threshold and hysteresis settings.
If disabled, 2 channel groups are available, which can use different threshold and hysteresis settings: D0 - D3, and D4 - D7.
Parameters:
<ThresCoup>
ON | OFF
*RST:
ON
LOGic:GROup<m>:TECHnology <ThresholdType>
Sets the threshold value for the selected channel group, or for all logic channels.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<ThresholdType>
.
1..3
1 = all logic channels D0 to D7
2 = group D0 to D3
3= group D4 to D7
The suffix only takes effect if LOGic:THCoupling is OFF.
TTL | ECL | CMOS | USER
TTL: 1.4 V
ECL: -1.3 V
CMOS: 2.5 V
USER: Set the value with LOGic:GROup<m>:USER.
*RST:
TTL
LOGic:GROup<m>:USER <ThresUserValue>
Sets the threshold value if LOGic:GROup<m>:TECHnology is set to USER.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<ThresUserValue>
.
1..3
1 = all logic channels D0 to D7
2 = group D0 to D3
3= group D4 to D7
The suffix only takes effect if LOGic:THCoupling is OFF.
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-8 to 8
1E-3
1.4
V
LOGic:GROup<m>:THReshold?
Returns the current threshold value.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
227
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Logic Analyzer (R&S RTH-B1 MSO)
Suffix:
<m>
Return values:
<Level>
Usage:
.
1..3
1 = all logic channels D0 to D7
2 = group D0 to D3
3= group D4 to D7
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-10 to 10
1E-3
0
V
Query only
LOGic:GROup<m>:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis>
Hysteresis avoids the change of signal states due to noise oscillation around the
threshold level. Set a small hysteresis for clean signals, and large hysteresis for noisy
signals.
Suffix:
<m>
Parameters:
<Hysteresis>
.
1..3
1 = all logic channels D0 to D7
2 = group D0 to D3
3= group D4 to D7
The suffix only takes effect if LOGic:THCoupling is OFF.
SMALl | MEDium | LARGe
*RST:
MEDium
POD:STATe?
Returns the connection state of the logic probe.
Return values:
<PODConnected>
ON | OFF
*RST:
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
OFF
Query only
228
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Documenting Results
12.10 Documenting Results
12.10.1 Screenshots
HCOPy:LANGuage........................................................................................................ 229
HCOPy:COLor...............................................................................................................229
HCOPy:INVerse.............................................................................................................229
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................... 229
HCOPy:IMMediate......................................................................................................... 229
HCOPy:LANGuage <FileFormat>
Defines the format of the screenshot file.
Parameters:
<FileFormat>
PNG | JPG | BMP | TIFF
*RST:
PNG
HCOPy:COLor <BlackWhite>
Creates a black and white screenshot.
Parameters:
<BlackWhite>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
HCOPy:INVerse <InverseColor>
Inverts the colors of the output, i.e. a dark waveform is printed on a white background.
Parameters:
<InverseColor>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
MMEMory:NAME <Filename>
Defines the filename of the next screenshot.
Parameters:
<Filename>
String with the filename
HCOPy:IMMediate
Saves the current display in a new screenshot.
Usage:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
Event
229
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Instrument Settings
12.11 Instrument Settings
SYSTem:DATE..............................................................................................................230
SYSTem:TIME...............................................................................................................230
DISPlay:PERSistence[:TYPE]......................................................................................... 230
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME............................................................................................ 231
DISPlay:CONTrast......................................................................................................... 231
DIAGnostic:SERVice:LCD:BRIGthness............................................................................ 231
SYSTem:DATE [<Year>], [<Month>], [<Day>]
SYSTem:DATE? [<Year>], [<Month>]
Sets the date on the instrument.
Parameters:
<Day>
Range:
1 to 31
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
Parameters for setting and query:
<Year>
Range:
2012 to 2099
Increment: 1
*RST:
2012
<Month>
Range:
1 to 12
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
SYSTem:TIME [<Hours>], [<Minutes>], [<Seconds>]
SYSTem:TIME? [<Hours>], [<Minutes>]
Sets the time on the instrument.
Parameters:
<Seconds>
Range:
0 to 59
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
Parameters for setting and query:
<Hours>
Range:
0 to 24
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
<Minutes>
Range:
0 to 59
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
DISPlay:PERSistence[:TYPE] <PersistenceType>
Defines how long every new data point remains on the screen.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
230
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Remote Control Commands
Instrument Settings
Parameters:
<PersistenceType>
OFF | TIME | INF
OFF
Deactivates persistence.
TIME
Data points remain on the screen for the duration defined with
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME.
INF
Data points remain on the screen infinitely until persistence is
set to OFF.
*RST:
OFF
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME <PersistenceTime>
Sets a user-defined persistence time. The command takes effect if DISPlay:
PERSistence[:TYPE] is set to TIMe.
Parameters:
<PersistenceTime>
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.05 to 10
0.01
0.05
s
DISPlay:CONTrast <ContrastMode>
If enabled, the waveforms are displayed in black color on white background.
Parameters:
<ContrastMode>
ON | OFF
*RST:
OFF
DIAGnostic:SERVice:LCD:BRIGthness <LCDBrightness>
Changes the brightness of the touchscreen.
Parameters:
<LCDBrightness>
LOW | MEDium | HIGH
*RST:
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
MEDium
231
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
Syntax for Common Commands
Annex
A SCPI Command Structure
SCPI commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. The header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0
to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several mnemonics
(keywords). Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
The commands can be either device-specific or device-independent (common commands). Common and device-specific commands differ in their syntax.
A.1 Syntax for Common Commands
Common (=device-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk (*) and possibly one or more parameters.
Examples:
*RST
RESET
Resets the instrument.
*ESE
EVENT STATUS ENABLE
Sets the bits of the event status enable
registers.
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS QUERY
Queries the contents of the event status
register.
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY
Queries the instrument identification
string.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
232
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
Syntax for Device-Specific Commands
A.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands
Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the
instrument.
For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for
this section:
●
DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
●
FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>]
●
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
●
HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
●
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
●
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
●
HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string>
●
HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
●
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
●
HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value>
●
MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
●
SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
●
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value>
●
SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
Long and short form
The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by
upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short
form or the long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
Example:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.
Case-insensitivity
Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the
manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
Numeric suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels
or sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command.
Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, <i>) and are replaced
by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the
suffix 1.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
233
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
Syntax for Device-Specific Commands
Example:
Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2
This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control
For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix
1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in
manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.
Optional mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The
instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some
commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes
Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.
Example:
Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow
parameter with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
Parameters
Parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". If several parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a comma (,). For a description
of the parameter types, refer to Chapter A.3, "SCPI Parameters", on page 235.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
Command:HCOP:DEV:CMAP:COL:RGB 3,32,44
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
234
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
SCPI Parameters
Special characters
|
Parameters
A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The
effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation
Mnemonics
A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are
indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these mnemonics
needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of
which of the mnemonics is used.
Example:
DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created:
SENS:BAND:RES 1
SENS:BWID:RES 1
[]
Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted.
Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{}
Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
A.3 SCPI Parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The
parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9,
11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). Allowed parameters are:
●
Numeric values
●
Special numeric values
●
Boolean parameters
●
Text
●
Character strings
●
Block data
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are
specified in the command description.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
235
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
SCPI Parameters
Numeric values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range
-32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent
alone is not allowed. In the case of physical quantities, the unit can be entered.
Allowed unit prefixes are G (giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also allowed), K
(kilo), M (milli), U (micro) and N (nano). If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example: SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Allowed unit prefixes are:
●
G (giga)
●
MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ
●
K (kilo)
●
M (milli)
●
U (micro)
●
N (nano)
If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit
is represented by the PCT string.
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
Special numeric values
The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values. In the case of a
query, the numeric value is provided.
●
MIN/MAX
MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
●
DEF
DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.
●
UP/DOWN
UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step width
can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be
set via UP, DOWN.
●
INF/NINF
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
236
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
SCPI Parameters
INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37,
respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses.
●
NAN
Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero
by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing
values.
Example:
Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum
Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ?, Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command. They must be entered following the quotation mark.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum
Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represented by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by
"OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a
query.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
Text parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the
header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short form of the text is provided.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
Character strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
237
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
Overview of Syntax Elements
Example:
HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" or HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
Block data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. A
command using a block data parameter has the following structure:
Example:
FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many
of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are
transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a
NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of
the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation
of the data into blocks of definite length.
A.4 Overview of Syntax Elements
The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements:
:
The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level.
;
The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
,
The comma separates several parameters of a command.
?
The question mark forms a query.
*
The asterisk marks a common command.
''
Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are
possible).
"
#
The hash symbol introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
●
Binary: #B10110
●
Octal: #O7612
●
Hexa: #HF3A7
●
Block: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the
parameters.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
238
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
Responses to Queries
A.5 Structure of a command line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of
the following:
●
a <New Line>
●
a <New Line> with EOI
●
an EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the
next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a
colon.
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM
system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels
in common, the command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command
after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels. The colon
following the semicolon must be omitted in this case.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP
command system, i.e. they have one level in common.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level
below HCOP. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the
command line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
A new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL
HCOP:IMM
A.6 Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard
IEEE 488.2.
●
The requested parameter is transmitted without a header.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
239
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
SCPI Command Structure
Responses to Queries
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?, Response: LAND
●
Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a
special text parameter are returned as numeric values.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX, Response: 3.5E9
●
Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the
basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in
the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
●
Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
●
Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
240
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Command Sequence and Synchronization
Preventing Overlapping Execution
B Command Sequence and Synchronization
IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped (asynchronous) and sequential
commands:
●
A sequential command finishes executing before the next command starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential
commands.
●
An overlapping or asynchronous command does not automatically finish executing
before the next command starts executing. Usually, overlapping commands take
longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed. If
overlapping commands must be executed in a defined order, e.g. to avoid wrong
measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This method is called
synchronization between the controller and the instrument.
Setting commands within one command line, even though they are implemented as
sequential commands, are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have
been received. To make sure that commands are carried out in a certain order, each
command must be sent in a separate command line.
Example: Commands and queries in one message
Do not combine queries with commands that affect the queried value in one program
message because the response to the query is not predictable.
The following commands always return the specified result:
:CHAN:SCAL 0.01;POS 1
:CHAN:SCAL?
Result:
0.01 (10 mV/div)
As a rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.
For further information, refer to:
●
rohde-schwarz.com/rckb: Rohde & Schwarz web page that provides information on
instrument drivers and remote control.
●
"Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from John
M. Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00). The book offers detailed information
on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
B.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be
carried out after the hardware has been set. By suitable programming, the controller
can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
241
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Command Sequence and Synchronization
Preventing Overlapping Execution
Table B-1: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Command
Action
Programming the controller
*OPC
Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR
after all previous commands have been executed.
●
●
●
*OPC?
Stops command processing until 1 is
returned. This is only the case after the Operation Complete bit has been set in the ESR.
This bit indicates that the previous setting has
been completed.
Sending *OPC? directly after the command
whose processing should be terminated
before other commands can be executed.
*WAI
Stops further command processing until all
commands sent before *WAI have been executed.
Sending *WAI directly after the command
whose processing should be terminated
before other commands are executed.
Setting bit 0 in the ESE
Setting bit 5 in the SRE
Waiting for service request (SRQ)
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? appended to an overlapped command is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process. The
two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command.
For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller
or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use
one of the following methods:
*OPC with a service request
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request.
3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC
4. Wait for a service request
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request
1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request.
2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?
3. Wait for a service request
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Event Status Register (ESE)
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: *OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
242
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
Command Sequence and Synchronization
Preventing Overlapping Execution
*OPC? with short timeout
1. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
2. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: <short timeout>; *OPC?
3. A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished. In
case of a timeout, the operation is ongoing.
4. Reset timeout to former value
5. Clear the error queue with SYStem:ERRor? to remove the "-410, Query interrupted" entries.
Using several threads in the controller application
As an alternative, provided the programming environment of the controller application
supports threads, separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for controlling the instrument(s) via SCPI.
A thread waiting for a *OPC? thus will not block the GUI or the communication with
other instruments.
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
243
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
List of Commands
List of Commands
ACQuire:ARESet:IMMediate..........................................................................................................................167
ACQuire:AVAilable?.......................................................................................................................................198
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt............................................................................................................................167
ACQuire:MODE............................................................................................................................................. 166
ACQuire:POINts:ARATe?.............................................................................................................................. 165
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]?.............................................................................................................................167
ACQuire:RESolution?.................................................................................................................................... 168
AUToscale..................................................................................................................................................... 160
BUS:FORMat.................................................................................................................................................214
BUS:I2C:FCOunt?......................................................................................................................................... 216
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:AACCess?.................................................................................................................. 216
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ACCess?.................................................................................................................... 216
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ACOMplete?............................................................................................................... 217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADBStart?...................................................................................................................217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADDRess?..................................................................................................................217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ADEVice?................................................................................................................... 217
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:AMODe?.....................................................................................................................218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:ASTart?...................................................................................................................... 218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BCOunt?.....................................................................................................................218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:ACCess?....................................................................................................218
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:ACKStart?.................................................................................................. 219
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:COMPlete?................................................................................................ 219
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:STARt?...................................................................................................... 219
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:BYTE<n>:VALue?...................................................................................................... 220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:DATA?........................................................................................................................ 220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:RWBStart?..................................................................................................................220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STARt?....................................................................................................................... 220
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STATus?.....................................................................................................................221
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<m>:STOP?........................................................................................................................221
BUS:I2C:SCL:SOURce..................................................................................................................................215
BUS:I2C:SCL:THReshold..............................................................................................................................215
BUS:I2C:SDA:SOURce................................................................................................................................. 215
BUS:I2C:SDA:THReshold..............................................................................................................................215
BUS:I2C:TECHnology....................................................................................................................................215
BUS:SPI:MISO:SOURce............................................................................................................................... 222
BUS:SPI:MISO:THReshold............................................................................................................................223
BUS:SPI:MOSI:SOURce............................................................................................................................... 222
BUS:SPI:MOSI:THReshold............................................................................................................................223
BUS:SPI:SCLK:SLOPe..................................................................................................................................222
BUS:SPI:SCLK:SOURce............................................................................................................................... 222
BUS:SPI:SCLK:THReshold........................................................................................................................... 223
BUS:SPI:SSEL:POLarity................................................................................................................................222
BUS:SPI:SSEL:SOURce............................................................................................................................... 222
BUS:SPI:SSEL:THReshold............................................................................................................................223
BUS:SPI:TECHnology................................................................................................................................... 223
BUS:SPI:WSIZe.............................................................................................................................................223
BUS:UART:BITRate.......................................................................................................................................225
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
244
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
List of Commands
BUS:UART:FRAMemode...............................................................................................................................226
BUS:UART:ORDer.........................................................................................................................................226
BUS:UART:PARity.........................................................................................................................................225
BUS:UART:POLarity......................................................................................................................................224
BUS:UART:SBIT............................................................................................................................................225
BUS:UART:SOURce......................................................................................................................................224
BUS:UART:SSIZe..........................................................................................................................................225
BUS:UART:STDBitrate.................................................................................................................................. 224
BUS:UART:THReshold..................................................................................................................................224
BUS:UART:TOUT.......................................................................................................................................... 226
CALCulate:MATH:STATe.............................................................................................................................. 195
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:POSition........................................................................................................... 196
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:RANGe............................................................................................................. 196
CALCulate:MATH:VERTical:SCALe.............................................................................................................. 195
CALCulate:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine].................................................................................................... 195
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth............................................................................................................................. 163
CHANnel<m>:COUPling................................................................................................................................163
CHANnel<m>:DESKew................................................................................................................................. 164
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent.................................................................................................................. 199
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:NSEGments..............................................................................................................198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAY........................................................................................................................ 199
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:REPLay.................................................................................................................... 199
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt....................................................................................................................... 198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STOP........................................................................................................................199
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TPACq...................................................................................................................... 198
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?.............................................................................................................200
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate?................................................................................................................... 200
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?.............................................................................................................. 200
CHANnel<m>:HISTory[:STATe].................................................................................................................... 198
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet................................................................................................................................... 163
CHANnel<m>:POLarity..................................................................................................................................162
CHANnel<m>:POSition..................................................................................................................................162
CHANnel<m>:PROBe....................................................................................................................................161
CHANnel<m>:RANGe................................................................................................................................... 161
CHANnel<m>:SCALe.................................................................................................................................... 161
CHANnel<m>:STATe.....................................................................................................................................160
CURSor:COUPling.........................................................................................................................................191
CURSor:DELTa?........................................................................................................................................... 193
CURSor:FUNCtion.........................................................................................................................................191
CURSor:ITDelta?...........................................................................................................................................193
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:ACTual?...............................................................................................194
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:RESult:LIMit?................................................................................................... 194
CURSor:MEASurement<m>:TYPE................................................................................................................192
CURSor:SCPLing.......................................................................................................................................... 192
CURSor:SCReen...........................................................................................................................................192
CURSor:SOURce.......................................................................................................................................... 191
CURSor:STATe............................................................................................................................................. 191
CURSor:TDELta?.......................................................................................................................................... 193
CURSor:X1Position....................................................................................................................................... 193
CURSor:X2Position....................................................................................................................................... 193
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
245
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
List of Commands
CURSor:Y1AMplitude?.................................................................................................................................. 194
CURSor:Y1Position....................................................................................................................................... 193
CURSor:Y2AMplitude?.................................................................................................................................. 194
CURSor:Y2Position....................................................................................................................................... 193
DIAGnostic:SERVice:LCD:BRIGthness.........................................................................................................231
DISPlay:CONTrast.........................................................................................................................................231
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME.......................................................................................................................... 231
DISPlay:PERSistence[:TYPE]....................................................................................................................... 230
HCOPy:COLor............................................................................................................................................... 229
HCOPy:IMMediate.........................................................................................................................................229
HCOPy:INVerse.............................................................................................................................................229
HCOPy:LANGuage........................................................................................................................................229
LOGGer:CURSor:TDELta?............................................................................................................................210
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:COUPling...................................................................................................................209
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:POSition.....................................................................................................................209
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:RESult<n>[:AMPLitude]?...........................................................................................210
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCPLing.....................................................................................................................208
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:SCReen..................................................................................................................... 209
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:STATe........................................................................................................................208
LOGGer:CURSor<m>:TYPE......................................................................................................................... 208
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:ENABled?........................................................................................................ 213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:CURRentsampl?..................................................................................212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:POSition?...........................................................................212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MAXimum:VALue?.............................................................................. 212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MEAN?................................................................................................ 213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:POSition?............................................................................ 212
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:MINimum:VALue?............................................................................... 213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev?............................................................................................. 213
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:SOURce?.........................................................................................................214
LOGGer:MEASurement<m>:TYPE?............................................................................................................. 214
LOGGer:RECording:STARt?......................................................................................................................... 211
LOGGer:RECording:TOTal?..........................................................................................................................211
LOGGer:SLOT:CLEar....................................................................................................................................208
LOGGer:SLOT:CURRent...............................................................................................................................207
LOGGer:SLOT:LOAD.................................................................................................................................... 207
LOGGer:SOURce.......................................................................................................................................... 207
LOGGer:TIMebase:SCALe............................................................................................................................207
LOGGer:TIMebase:SRATe............................................................................................................................207
LOGGer:ZOOM:ENABle................................................................................................................................ 210
LOGGer:ZOOM:POSition.............................................................................................................................. 211
LOGGer:ZOOM:SCALe................................................................................................................................. 211
LOGic:GROup<m>:HYSTeresis.................................................................................................................... 228
LOGic:GROup<m>:TECHnology................................................................................................................... 227
LOGic:GROup<m>:THReshold?................................................................................................................... 227
LOGic:GROup<m>:USER............................................................................................................................. 227
LOGic:THCoupling.........................................................................................................................................226
MASK:CHANnel<m>:CREatemask............................................................................................................... 201
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:XWIDth.................................................................................................... 201
MASK:CHANnel<m>:PROPerties:YWIDth.................................................................................................... 201
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL:PERCentage?.........................................................................................202
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
246
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
List of Commands
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:FAIL[:COUNt]?................................................................................................ 203
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS:PERCentage?.......................................................................................203
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:PASS[:COUNt]?.............................................................................................. 203
MASK:CHANnel<m>:RESult:TOTL[:COUNt]?...............................................................................................204
MASK:CHANnel<m>:STATe......................................................................................................................... 201
MASK:ELAPsedtime:TOTal?.........................................................................................................................204
MASK:ELAPsedtime[:SECS]?....................................................................................................................... 204
MASK:ONViolation[:SELection]..................................................................................................................... 202
MASK:RST.....................................................................................................................................................202
MASK[:TESTstate]?.......................................................................................................................................202
MEASurement<m>:AOFF..............................................................................................................................189
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe................................................................................................................190
MEASurement<m>:ENABle...........................................................................................................................188
MEASurement<m>:RESult:ACTual?............................................................................................................. 190
MEASurement<m>:RESult:LIMit?................................................................................................................. 190
MEASurement<m>:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 188
MEASurement<m>:TYPE..............................................................................................................................189
METer<m>:FETCh?.......................................................................................................................................206
METer<m>:READ?........................................................................................................................................205
METer<m>:SENSe:RANGe...........................................................................................................................205
METer<m>:SENSe:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 205
METer<m>:SENSe:STATe............................................................................................................................204
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................................................... 229
OP[:MODE]....................................................................................................................................................159
POD:STATe?.................................................................................................................................................228
REFCurve:DELete......................................................................................................................................... 197
REFCurve:NAME...........................................................................................................................................197
REFCurve:OPEN...........................................................................................................................................197
REFCurve:POSition.......................................................................................................................................197
REFCurve:SAVE............................................................................................................................................197
REFCurve:SOURce.......................................................................................................................................196
REFCurve:STATe..........................................................................................................................................196
REFCurve:UPDate.........................................................................................................................................196
RUN............................................................................................................................................................... 166
STOP............................................................................................................................................................. 166
SYSTem:DATE..............................................................................................................................................230
SYSTem:TIME...............................................................................................................................................230
TIMebase:HORizontal:POSition.................................................................................................................... 165
TIMebase:RANGe..........................................................................................................................................165
TIMebase:REFerence....................................................................................................................................165
TIMebase:SCALe...........................................................................................................................................164
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CONDition..................................................................................................................181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce:EDGE.........................................................................................................181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce[:VALue]...................................................................................................... 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:DSOurce[:VALue]...................................................................................................... 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe........................................................................................................................ 181
TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe........................................................................................................................ 182
TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe................................................................................................................................. 171
TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity............................................................................................................................. 171
TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe...............................................................................................................................172
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
247
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
List of Commands
TRIGger:GLITch:WIDTh................................................................................................................................ 172
TRIGger:HOLDoff:EVENts.............................................................................................................................170
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MAX................................................................................................................................. 170
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MIN...................................................................................................................................170
TRIGger:HOLDoff:MODE.............................................................................................................................. 169
TRIGger:HOLDoff:TIME.................................................................................................................................170
TRIGger:INTerval:DELTa.............................................................................................................................. 187
TRIGger:INTerval:RANGe............................................................................................................................. 186
TRIGger:INTerval:SLOPe..............................................................................................................................186
TRIGger:INTerval:WIDTh.............................................................................................................................. 187
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:LOWer................................................................................................................ 177
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:RUNT:UPPer.................................................................................................................177
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:LOWer................................................................................................................179
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:SLEW:UPPer.................................................................................................................179
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:VALue............................................................................................................................169
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:LOWer............................................................................................................184
TRIGger:LEVel<m>:WINDow:UPPer.............................................................................................................184
TRIGger:MNR................................................................................................................................................171
TRIGger:MODE............................................................................................................................................. 168
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe:COMBination....................................................................................................... 174
TRIGger:PATTern:STATe[:CHANnel<1..22>]............................................................................................... 174
TRIGger:PATTern:TIMeout[:TIME]................................................................................................................ 175
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa................................................................................................................. 176
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe................................................................................................................ 175
TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh]............................................................................................................... 175
TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa.................................................................................................................................. 178
TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity............................................................................................................................... 178
TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe.................................................................................................................................178
TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh.................................................................................................................................. 178
TRIGger:SLEW:DELTa..................................................................................................................................180
TRIGger:SLEW:RANGe.................................................................................................................................179
TRIGger:SLEW:RATE................................................................................................................................... 180
TRIGger:SLEW:SLOPe................................................................................................................................. 179
TRIGger:SOURce..........................................................................................................................................169
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:EDGE..............................................................................................................182
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce:FIRStedge.......................................................................................................183
TRIGger:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue]........................................................................................................... 182
TRIGger:SPATtern:DSOurce[:VALue]........................................................................................................... 182
TRIGger:SPATtern:ORDer............................................................................................................................ 183
TRIGger:SPATtern:PATTern......................................................................................................................... 183
TRIGger:STATe:CHANnel<1..22>.................................................................................................................176
TRIGger:STATe:COMBination.......................................................................................................................177
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce:EDGE.................................................................................................................. 177
TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce[:VALue]............................................................................................................... 177
TRIGger:TIMeout:RANGe..............................................................................................................................184
TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME................................................................................................................................. 184
TRIGger:TYPE...............................................................................................................................................169
TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa.................................................................................................................................173
TRIGger:WIDTh:MAX.................................................................................................................................... 173
TRIGger:WIDTh:MIN..................................................................................................................................... 174
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
248
R&S®Scope Rider RTH
List of Commands
TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity.............................................................................................................................. 172
TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe................................................................................................................................172
TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh.................................................................................................................................173
TRIGger:WINDow:DELTa..............................................................................................................................186
TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe.............................................................................................................................185
TRIGger:WINDow:TIME................................................................................................................................ 184
TRIGger:WINDow:WIDTh..............................................................................................................................185
ZOOM:ENABle...............................................................................................................................................187
ZOOM:POSition.............................................................................................................................................188
ZOOM:SCALe................................................................................................................................................187
User Manual 1326.1578.02 ─ 04
249
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement